manualshive.com logo in svg

Piper PA-32R-301T SARATOGA S, Maintenance Manual

The Piper PA-32R-301T SARATOGA S Maintenance Manual is an essential resource for aircraft owners and mechanics. This comprehensive manual provides detailed instructions for maintenance and repairs, ensuring safe and efficient operation. Download this free manual from manualshive.com to access the necessary information for maintaining your Saratoga S aircraft.

Share
Download
background image

THERMOPLASTIC REPAIRS (Cont.)

Surface Scratches, Abrasions or Ground-in-Dirt

Figure 2

2. Surface Scratches, Abrasion or Ground-in-Dirt: (Refer to Figure 2.)

a. Shallow scratches and abraded surfaces are usually repaired by following directions on containers

of conventional automotive buffing and rubbing compounds.

b. If large dirt particles are embedded in thermoplastic parts, they can be removed with a hot air gun

capable of supplying heat in temperature range of 300 to 400F. Use care not to overheat material.

Hold nozzle of gun about 1/4 of an inch away from surface and apply heat with a circular motion

until area is sufficiently soft to remove dirt particles.

c. Thermoplastic will return to its original shape upon cooling.

3. Deep scratches, Shallow Nicks and Small Holes: (Less than 1 inch in diameter.) (Refer to Figure 3.)

a. Solvent cements will fit virtually any of these applications. If area to be repaired is very small, it

may be quicker to make a satisfactory cement by dissolving thermoplastic material of the same

type being repaired in solvent until desired paste-like consistency is achieved.

b. This mixture is then applied to damaged area. Upon solvent evaporation, hard durable solids

remaining can easily be shaped to desired contour by filing or sanding.

c. Solvent adhesives are not recommended for highly stressed areas, on thin walled parts or for

patching holes greater than 1/4 inch in diameter.

d. For larger damages an epoxy patching compound is recommended. This type material is a two

part, fast curing, easy sanding commercially available compound.

e. Adhesion can be increased by roughing bonding surface with sandpaper and by utilizing as

much surface area for bond as possible.

f.

Patching compound is mixed in equal portions on a hard flat surface using a figure eight motion.

Damaged area is cleaned with perchlorethylene or VM&P Naptha prior to applying compound.

(Refer to figure 4.)

g. A mechanical sander can be used after compound is cured, providing sander is kept in  constant

motion to prevent heat buildup.

PIPER AIRCRAFT

PA-32R-301/301T

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

51-00-00

Page 51-7

Reissued: July 1, 1993

3H6

Summary of Contents for PA-32R-301T SARATOGA S

Page 1: ... PA 32R 301 SARATOGA SP PA 32R 301 SARATOGA II HP PA 32R 301T SARATOGA SP Card 1 of 4 THIS HANDBOOK INCLUDES THE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION REQUIRED TO BE AVAILABLE BY FAR PART 23 PART NUMBER 761 719 1A1 Courtesy of Bomar Flying Service www bomar biz ...

Page 2: ...Published by Technical Publications Piper Aircraft Corporation 2926 Piper Drive Vero Beach Florida 32960 U S A 1A2 ...

Page 3: ...0923 Septembcr 23 1981 1 2 and 3 PR820913 Septembcr 13 1982 1 2 and 3 PR821230 December 30 1982 1 2 and 3 PR830715 July 15 1983 1 2 and 3 PR840810 August 10 1984 1 2 and 3 PR850815 August 15 1985 3 IR860430 April 30 1986 Interim 1 IR860730 July 30 1986 Interim 1 IR860920 September 20 1986 Interim 1 Revisions to this Maintenance Manual 761 719 reissued July 1 1993 are as follows PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 3...

Page 4: ...LIST OF EFFECTIVE REVISIONS Log of Revisions Effectivity Date Aerofiche Card Effectivity PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Effective Revisions Page 2 Reissued July 1 1993 1A4 ...

Page 5: ...1A7 July 1 1993 Aerofiche 1A8 July 1 1993 Identifying Revised Material 1A8 July 1 1993 Serial Number Explanation 1A8 July 1 1993 System Chapter Index Guide 1A9 July 1 1993 Warnings Cautions and Notes 1A14 July 1 1993 Supplementary Publications 1A14 July 1 1993 Vendor Publications 1A15 July 1 1993 Wire Codes 1A19 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Introduction Contents Pa...

Page 6: ...hased from sources other than PIPER even though identical in appearance may not have had the required tests and inspections performed may be different in fabrication techniques and materials and may be dangerous when installed in an airplane Reworked salvaged or those parts obtained from non PIPER approved sources which the service history is unknown or cannot be authenticated may have been subjec...

Page 7: ...nt of the standard numbering system The element 01 of the number 28 40 01 is a subject designator This element is assigned at the option of the manufacturer and may or may not be used C Application Any publication conforming to the GAMA format will use the same basic numbering system A per son wishing information concerning the indication portion of the fuel system would refer to the System Chapte...

Page 8: ...he printed matter that was changed A black line in the left hand margin opposite the chapter section subject page number and date will indicate that the text was unchanged but the material was relocated to a different page G Serial Number Explanation PA 32R 301 Saratoga SP 1980 Serial Numbers 32R 8013001 thru 32R 8013139 PA 32R 301 Saratoga SP 1981 Serial Numbers 32R 8113001 thru 32R 8113123 PA 32...

Page 9: ...8629005 and 3229001 thru 3229002 PA 32R 301T Turbo Saratoga SP 1987 Serial Numbers 32R 8629006 and 32290003 H System Chapter Index Guide The following System Chapter Subsystem Section Index Guide is prepared in accordance with GAMA Specification No 2 for use with Maintenance Manuals The following chapters are not applic able to this Maintenance Manual 31 36 38 49 53 54 60 72 75 and 83 SYSTEM SUB S...

Page 10: ...al 10 1F7 Replenishing 20 1G1 Scheduled Servicing 20 STANDARD PRACTICES AIRFRAME 00 1G19 General 21 ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS 00 1H8 General 40 1H10 Heating 50 1H14 Cooling 22 AUTO FLIGHT 00 1J9 General 23 COMMUNICATIONS 00 1J14 General 20 1J16 Emergency Locator Transmitter 24 ELECTRICAL POWER 00 1K1 General 30 1K3 DC Generation 40 1L19 External Power 50 1L21 Electrical Load Distribution 25 EQUIPMENT ...

Page 11: ...Indicating 29 HYDRAULIC POWER 00 2E21 General 10 2F19 Main 30 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION 00 2G19 General 10 2H1 Airfoil 30 2H17 Pitot and Static 40 2H19 Windows Windshields and Doors 60 2H21 Propellers Rotors 80 2H23 Detection 32 LANDING GEAR 00 3A18 General 10 3B4 Main Gear and Doors 20 3B22 Nose Gear and Doors 30 3C16 Extension and Retraction 40 3C22 Wheels and Brakes 60 3D18 Position and Warning P...

Page 12: ...dependent Position Determining 35 OXYGEN 00 3F10 General 10 3F12 Crew Passenger 37 VACUUM 00 3G8 General 10 3G12 Distribution 20 3G16 Indicating 39 ELECTRICAL ELECTRONIC PANELS MULTIPURPOSE PARTS 40 3G20 Multipurpose Electrical Parts 51 STRUCTURES 00 3G24 General 52 DOORS 00 3H16 General 10 3H18 Passenger Crew 30 3I2 Cargo 55 STABILIZERS 10 3I6 Horizontal Stabilizers 30 3I12 Vertical Stabilizer 40...

Page 13: ...opeller Assembly 20 3K6 Controlling 70 STANDARD PRACTICES ENGINE 00 3K12 General 71 POWER PLANT 00 3K16 General 10 3L6 Cowling 73 ENGINE FUEL SYSTEMS 10 4A15 Distribution 20 4A20 Controlling 74 IGNITION 00 4B3 General 10 4B5 Electrical Power Supply 20 4B22 Distribution 30 4C7 Switching 77 ENGINE INDICATING 00 4C13 General 10 4C13 Power 20 4C16 Temperature 78 EXHAUST 00 4C23 General PIPER AIRCRAFT ...

Page 14: ... to avoid injury or death to persons Cautions call attention to methods and proce dures which must be followed to avoid damage to equipment Notes call attention to methods which make the job easier Warning and caution shall be located directly above and notes directly beneath the text and be in line with the paragraphs to which they apply J Supplementary Publications The following is a list of pub...

Page 15: ...ATOR Vendor Address The Prestolite Co Division of Eltra Corp P O Box 280 Mortaon and Backus Streets Bay City Michigan 48706 3 ALTERNATOR Vendor Address Ford Motor Company Ford Electrical and Electronics 6 Parkland Blvd Suite 450 Dearborn Michigan 48126 313 322 4502 4 ALTERNATOR Vendor Address Electro Systems Airport Complex P O Box 273 Fort Deposit Alabama 06032 205 227 8306 5 AUTOFLIGHT Vendor Ad...

Page 16: ...10 ENGINE Maintenance Manual TEXTRON LYCOMING Vendor Address Textron Lycoming Subsidiary of Textron Inc 652 Oliver Street Williamsport Pennsylvania 17701 11 ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP Vendor Address Parker Hannifin Corp Airborne Division P O Box 4032 711 Taylor Street Elyria Ohio 44036 216 323 4676 777 9500 12 ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP Vendor Address Weldon Pumps 340 Golden Oak Parkway P O Box 46479 Oakwood Vill...

Page 17: ...n P O Box 90 Mobile Alabama 36601 205 438 3411 16 MAGNETOS Vendor Address Slick Electro Inc 530 Blackhawk Park Ave Rockford Illinois 61101 815 965 7704 17 NAVIGATION STROBE LIGHTS STANDBY MAP LIGHTS Vendor Address Whelen Engineering Co Inc Deep River Conneticut 203 526 5308 18 OXYGEN SYSTEM Vendor Address Scott Aviation 2225 Erie Street Lancaster New York 14086 716 683 5100 19 PROPELLER AND PROPEL...

Page 18: ...4 8111 21 TURBOCHARGER SAFETY AND OUTFLOW VALVE CONTROLLER VALVE Vendor Address Garrett AiResearch Industrial Division 3201 Lomita Blvd Torrance California 90505 22 VACUUM PUMP VACUUM REGULATORS DEICER PUMP Vendor Address Parker Hannifin Corp 1160 Center Road Avon Ohio 44011 216 871 6424 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Introduction Page 13 Reissued July 1 1993 1A18 ...

Page 19: ...C Control Surface CL Cigar Lighter CP Cabin Pressurization D Pitot Stall Warning Heat and Propeller Heat E Engine Instrument F Flight Instrument G Landing Gear GB Vent Defogger J Ignition K Starter L Lighting M Hourmeter OX Oxygen System P Power Q Fuel and Oil RP Radio Power RC Avionics Cooling S Stall Warning W Warning HARNESS CONNECTOR NUMBERS AND LOCATION E100 Series Left Wing E200 Series Right...

Page 20: ...NT LIMITER RECEPTACLE PLUG MATED PLUG RECEPTACLE GROUND TO CHASSIS WITH TERMINAL GROUND OR CIRCUIT RETURN GROUNDS FUSE A DIODES GENERAL ZENER UNIDIRECTIONAL ZENER BIDIRECTIONAL T P SHIELDED TWO CONDUCTOR W GROUND A B HORN HEATED ELEMENT SQUIB ELECTRIC IGNITER A INDICATOR LIGHT LETTER DENOTES COLOR ASTERISK IS NOT PART OF SYMBOL INCANDESCENT LAMP LAMPS FLUORESCENT LAMP MOTOR METER LETTER DENOTES TH...

Page 21: ... TEMPERATURE ACTUATED OPENS ON RISING TEMPERATURE OR t t t t NOTE t SYMBOL SHALL BE REPLACED BY DATA GIVING THE OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF THE DEVICE NORMALLY OPEN NORMALLY OPEN HELD CLOSED SELECTOR OR MULTI POSITION SWITCH NORMALLY CLOSED HELD OPEN LIMIT SWITCH DIRECTLY ACTUATED SPRING RETURN NORMALLY OPEN CLOSES ON RISING TEMPERATURE NORMALLY CLOSED OPENS ON RISING TEMPERATURE t t t NORMALLY OPEN ...

Page 22: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Introduction Page 17 Reissued July 1 1993 1A22 ...

Page 23: ...GRIDS 1A23 THROUGH 1A24 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Introduction Page 18 Reissued July 1 1993 1A23 ...

Page 24: ...ALPHA NUMERIC INDEX cont PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Alpha Numeric Index Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 1B1 SUBJECT CHAPTER PAGE GRID NO INFORMATION PENDING ...

Page 25: ...LPHA NUMERIC INDEX cont PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Alpha Numeric Index Page 2 Reissued July 1 1993 1B2 SUBJECT CHAPTER PAGE GRID NO GRIDS 1B2 THROUGH 1B24 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 26: ...CHAPTER 4 AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS 1C1 ...

Page 27: ...OF CONTENTS EFFECTIVITY CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY 4 00 00 AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS 1C3 July 1 1993 4 00 00 General 1C3 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 4 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 1C2 ...

Page 28: ...The safe life of the airframe structure will be released when the information becomes available 2 The safe limit of the propeller blades is unlimited NOTE Refer to the LIMITATIONS in the Pilot s Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual for a detailed delineation of the flight limitations of the airplane The mandatory replacement time and or inspection intervals of life limited pa...

Page 29: ...CHAPTER 5 TIME LIMITS MAINTENANCE CHECKS 1C4 ...

Page 30: ... 1 1993 5 20 00 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 1C8 July 1 1993 5 20 00 General Purpse Description 1C8 July 1 1993 5 20 00 Definitions 1C8 July 1 1993 Inspection Requirements 1C11 July 1 1993 5 20 00 Periodic Inspection 1C12 July 1 1993 5 20 00 Notes 1C24 July 1 1993 5 50 00 UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS 1D5 July 1 1993 5 50 00 General 1D5 July 1 1993 5 50 00 Special Inspections as Required Upon Condition ...

Page 31: ... those components found on the unserviceable at inspection may be found in the chapters covering the applicable air craft system When working on engines ground the magneto primary circuit before performing any operation PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 5 00 00 Page5 1 Reissued July 1 1993 1C6 ...

Page 32: ...fer to the applicable chapter of this manual for instructions on how to gain access to remove the item When performing inspection forms furnished by the Piper Factory Service Department avail able through Piper Dealers or Distributors NOTE In addition to inspection intervals required in Periodic Inspections preflight inspections must be performed PREFLIGHT CHECKS This check is for the pilot and or...

Page 33: ...ial amount of time to be recorded by the Federal Aviation Administration and received by Piper Aircraft to change the mailing address Owners and operators should make arrangements to keep abreast of service releases during this interim period through their Piper Service Center The Federal Aviation Administration FAA publishes Airworthiness Directives AD s that apply to specific aircraft They are m...

Page 34: ...performed only by Certified Mechanics who are qualified on this air craft utilizing acceptable methods techniques and practices to determine physical condition and detect defects b Checks Can be performed by pilots and or mechanics who are qualified on this aircraft and consists of examinations in the form of comparisons with stated standards for the purpose of verifying condition accuracy and tol...

Page 35: ... certified mechanic This test will be performed at the sched uled interval regardless of any bench test performed on a particular component while being repaired overhauled before scheduled interval bench test After the component is installed into the aircraft an operational test of the component and its related system should be per formed to ensure proper function Serviceable parts that were issue...

Page 36: ...item When performing the inspections use form P N 230 1085 available through Piper Service Centers In addition to inspection intervals required in Periodic Inspections preflight inspection must also be performed References to maintenance manual applicable areas are per the chapter system sub system assignment of subject material numbering system b Progressive Inspection The Progressive Inspection ...

Page 37: ...acks and corrosion PA 32R 301 II HP only WARNING Use extreme caution when rotating propeller by hand propeller may kick back Prior to rotating propeller ensure both magneto switch s are off grounded If magneto s are not grounded turning propeller may start engine 8 Rotate blades and check for tightness in hub pilot tube 9 Remove propeller remove sludge from propeller and crankshaft 10 Inspect comp...

Page 38: ...ature sender unit for leaks and security 7 Inspect oil lines and fitting for leaks security chafing dents and cracks see note 8 8 Clean and inspect oil radiator cooling fins 9 Remove and flush oil radiator see Note 16 CAUTION DO NOT USE MULTIGRADE OIL until Hartzell Service Bulletin 142B has been complied with 10 Fill engine with oil per information on cowl or lubrication chart in maintenance manu...

Page 39: ...uity 18 Check magneto points for proper clearance Maintain clearance of 0 016 19 Inspect magneto for oil seal leakage 20 Inspect breaker felts for proper lubrication 21 Inspect distributor block for cracks burned areas or corrosion and height of contact springs 22 Inspect magnetos to engine timing 23 Overhaul or replace magnetos see note 7 24 Remove air filter and clean per chapter 12 Replace as r...

Page 40: ...ity 40 Inspect crankcase for cracks leaks and security of seam bolts 41 Inspect engine mounts for cracks and loose mounting 42 Inspect all engine baffles also check engine baffle seals on PA 32R 301T 43 Inspect rubber engine mount bushings for deterioration Replace as required 44 Inspect firewall seals 45 Inspect condition and tension of alternator drive belt Refer to chapters 21 and 24 if air con...

Page 41: ...fing 5 Inspect all V band couplings for security and integrity of T bolts and lock wire Refer to latest revision Piper Service Bulletin No 884 6 Inspect operation of alternate air control 7 Inspect oil inlet and outlet ports in center housing to include the inlet check valve for leaks 8 Inspect turbine heat blanket for condition and security 9 Inspect interconnect linkage between wastegate valve a...

Page 42: ... landing navigation strobe cabin and instrument lights 12 Inspect instruments lines and attachments 13 Inspect gyro operated instruments and electric turn and bank Overhaul or replace as required 14 Replace central air filter 15 Clean or replace vacuum regulator filter 16 Inspect altimeter Calibrate altimeter system in accordance with FAR 91 170 if appropriate 17 Inspect operation of fuel selector...

Page 43: ...er dehydrator see chapter 21 13 Inspect air conditioner condenser air scoop rigging 14 Inspect fuel lines valves and gauges for damage and operation 15 Remove drain and clean fuel strainer bowl and screen located in bottom of selector valve Drain and clean at least every 90 days 16 Inspect security of all lines 17 Inspect vertical fin and rudder surfaces for damage 18 Inspect rudder hinges sector ...

Page 44: ...ds and attaching parts for security routing chafing deterioration wear and correct installation see note 25 36 Inspect emergency locator transmitter battery for replacement date or time see latest revision of Piper S L No 820 37 Inspect E L T external whip antenna for damage Replace if antenna has sharp bends or kinks 38 Reinstall inspection plates and panels F WING GROUP 1 Remove inspection plate...

Page 45: ...inspect and repack bearings 7 Inspect wheels for cracks corrosion and broken bolts 8 Check tire pressure 9 Inspect brake lining and disc for wear 10 Inspect brake backing plates for cracks 11 Inspect condition of brake and hydraulic lines 12 Inspect shimmy dampener operation 13 Inspect gear forks for damage 14 Inspect oleo struts for fluid leaks and scoring 15 Inspect gear struts attachments torqu...

Page 46: ...pressure and flow readings 3 Check oil pressure and temperature 4 Check alternator output 5 Check manifold pressure 6 Check alternate air 7 Check parking brake 8 Check vacuum gauge 9 Check gyros for noise and roughness 10 Check cabin heater operation 11 Check magneto switch operation 12 Check magneto rpm variation 13 Check throttle and mixture operation 14 Check propeller smoothness 15 Check prope...

Page 47: ...eissued July 1 1993 1C22 NATURE OF INSPECTION I GENERAL 1 Aircraft conforms to FAA Specification 2 All latest revision of Airworthiness Directives complied with 3 All latest revision of Manufacturers Service Bulletins and Letters complied with 4 Check for proper Pilot s Operating Handbook 5 Aircraft papers in proper order 50 100 500 1000 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Inspection time hrs ...

Page 48: ...on continued NOTE Refer to Notes 1 2 3 and 4 before performing inspections PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 5 20 00 Page 5 18 Reissued July 1 1993 1C23 NATURE OF INSPECTION PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 50 100 500 1000 Inspection time hrs ...

Page 49: ... overhaul refer to latest revision of Lycoming Service Letter L201 and Lycoming Service Instruction 1009 8 Replace flexible oil lines at engine TBO per latest revision Lycoming Service Bulletin 240 and latest revision of Lycoming Service Letter L201B 9 The compressor oil level should not be checked unless a freon leak has occurred requiring an addition of freon to the system CAUTION Environmental ...

Page 50: ...r to VSP 69 23 Complete vacuum system inspection of aircraft that incorporates the Auxiliary Vacuum Pump Motor Assembly 4A3 1 requires gaining access to under the floorboard of the right side of the forward baggage compartment where this assembly is located 24 The Airborne Auxiliary Vacuum Pump Motor Assembly 4A3 1 must be removed from service and replaced at 500 hours of operating time as indicat...

Page 51: ...GRIDS 1D2 TGHROUGH 1D4 PAGES 5 21 THROUGH 5 23 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 5 20 00 Page 5 21 Reissued July 1 1993 1D2 ...

Page 52: ...wn to exceed the design land ing weight Check the following areas and items Wings for wrinkled skins loose or missing rivets Fuel leaks around the fuel tanks Wing spar webs bulkheads wing and fuselage stringers and skins for any signs of overstress or damage A possible alignment check to clarify any doubt of damage c Severe Turbulence Inspection The same items and locations should be checked as st...

Page 53: ...CHAPTER 6 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 1D6 ...

Page 54: ...NSIONS 1D8 July 1 1993 6 00 00 General 1D8 July 1 1993 6 00 00 Leading Particulars and Principal Dimensions 1D11 July 1 1993 6 00 00 Station Reference Lines 1D14 July 1 1993 6 00 00 Access and Inspection Provisions 1D15 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 6 Cont Effec Page 1 Rissued July 1 1993 1D7 ...

Page 55: ...he Manufacturers aircraft Association MAA plate located on the left side of the fuselage at approximately F A 278 6 The engine serial number plate is located on the left side of the engine oil sump just below cylinder number 5 Figure 1 Three View of PA 32R 301 Sheet 1 of 3 Saratoga SP PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 6 00 00 Page 6 1 Rissued July 1 1993 1D8 12 11 3 94 m 12 11 3 94...

Page 56: ...S AND AREAS cont Figure 1 Three View of PA 32R 301 Sheet 2 of 3 Saratoga II HP PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 6 00 00 Page 6 2 Rissued July 1 1993 1D9 12 11 5 6 7 1 36 2 11 1 8 6 27 10 5 7 11 ...

Page 57: ...e View of PA 32R 301 Sheet 3 of 3 Turbocharged Saratoga PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 6 00 00 Page 6 3 Rissued July 1 1993 1D10 12 11 3 94 m 5 6 1 68 m 7 11 2 16 m 36 0 10 97 m 11 1 3 38 m 29 0 8 84 7 11 2 41 m 9 0 2 74 m ...

Page 58: ...ector Bendix RSA 10ED1 or RSA 10ED1 or RSA 10ED2 RSA 10ED2 Magnetos Bendix D6LN 2031 3031 Dual Unison 6350 6351 D6LN 2031 3000 Mag with impulse Dual Mag with Dual Mag with coupling impulse coupling impulse coupling Magneto timing 20 degrees BTC 20 degrees BTC 20 degrees BTC Magneto Point Clearance 0 016 in 0 016 in 0 016 in Spark Plugs Refer to latest Refer to latest Refer to latest revision of Ly...

Page 59: ...002B PROPELLER Manufacturer Hartzell Hartzell Hartzell Hub Model See Chapter 61 Chart 1 See Chapter 61 See Chapter 61 Chart 2 Chart 3 Blade Model See Chapter 61 Chart 1 See Chapter 61 See Chapter 61 Chart 2 Chart 3 Governor Control Hartzell Hartzell Hartzell Governor Model F 4 11BZ V 5 4 F 4 11BZ FUEL SYSTEM Fuel Tanks 4 2 interconnected 4 2 interconnected 4 2 interconnected each wing each wing ea...

Page 60: ... 7 ft 11 in 7 ft 11 in Nose Wheel Travel 22 5 2 Left 22 5 2 Left 22 5 2 Left and Right and Right and Right Turning Distance Min 75 ft 6 in 75 ft 6 in 75 ft 6 in Wheel Nose Cleveland 40 77B or Cleveland 40 77B or Cleveland 40 77B or McCauley D 30500 McCauley D 30500 McCauley D 30500 Wheel Main Standard Cleveland 40 90C Cleveland 40 90C Cleveland 40 90C Heavy Duty Cleveland 40 120 Cleveland 40 120 C...

Page 61: ...he centerline of the airplane and W L 0 is 20 5 inches below the cabin floor as measured at the rear wing spar with the airplane level The reference datum line is located 78 4 inches ahead of the wing leading edge at the intersection of the straight and tapered section Station Reference Figure 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 6 00 00 Page 6 7 Rissued July 1 1993 1D14 BL 6 15 BL ...

Page 62: ...AL 6 00 00 Page 6 8 Rissued July 1 1993 1D15 1 1 8 9 10 2 4 3 5 6 7 11 12 12 13 12 10 9 8 14 15 16 15 17 18 19 21 5 20 22 23 24 25 EXTERIOR INTERIOR 1 TIP STABILATOR 2 COWL ENGINE ACCESS 3 SPINNER PROPELLER 4 DOOR OIL FILLER 5 DOOR NOSE GEAR 6 COVER AIR FILTER 7 COVER HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR BATTERY SERVICE 8 FAIRING ACCESS 9 TIP VERTICAL STABILIZER 10 TIP RUDDER 11 PANEL BATTERY HYDRAULIC 12 PLATES T...

Page 63: ...GRIDS 1D16 THROUGH 1D20 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 6 00 00 Page 6 9 Rissued July 1 1993 1D16 ...

Page 64: ...CHAPTER 7 LIFTING AND SHORING 1D21 ...

Page 65: ...NG AND SHORING TABLE OF CONTENTS EFFECTIVITY CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY 7 10 00 JACKING 1D23 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 7 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 1D22 ...

Page 66: ... jacks under the wing respective pads on the wing front spar CAUTION Be sure to apply sufficient support ballast Otherwise the airplane will slip forward and fall on the fuselage nose section 2 Attach a tail stand with approximately 300 pounds ballast to tail skid CAUTION If the purpose for placing the airplane on jacks is to service the hydraulic system the free fall valve knob should be pulled f...

Page 67: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 7 10 00 Page 7 2 Rissued July 1 1993 1D24 ...

Page 68: ...CHAPTER 8 LEVELING AND WEIGHING 1E1 ...

Page 69: ...TABLE OF CONTENTS EFFECTIVITY CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY 8 10 00 LEVELING 1E3 July 1 1993 8 20 00 WEIGHING 1E4 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 7 Cont Effec Page 1 Rissued July 1 1993 1E2 ...

Page 70: ...eveling screws located immediately below the left front side window Refer to Figure 1 Place a spirit level on these screw heads and deflate the nose wheel tire or adjust the jacks until the bubble of the level is centered 2 To laterally level the airplane place a spirit level across the baggage compartment floor along the rear bulkhead refer to Figure 1 and deflate the tire on the high side of the...

Page 71: ...ure the scales from rolling forward and tow the airplane up onto the scales Refer to Towing Chapter 9 3 Remove the ramp so as not to interfere with the scales 4 If the airplane is to be weighed for weight and balance computations level the airplane Weighing Figure 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 8 20 00 Page 8 2 Revised July 1 1993 1E4 ...

Page 72: ...CHAPTER 9 TOWING AND TAXIING 1E5 ...

Page 73: ...TABLE OF CONTENTS EFFECTIVITY CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY 9 10 00 TOWING 1E7 July 1 1993 9 20 00 TAXIING 1E8 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 9 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 1E6 ...

Page 74: ...l steering bar that is stowed below the forward ledge of the rear baggage compartment or by using power equipment that will not damage or cause excess strain to the nose gear steering assembly Tow bar engages front axle inside fork In the event towing lines are necessary lines rope should be attached to both main gear struts as high up on the tubes as possible Lines should be long enough to clear ...

Page 75: ...ess 2 Taxi with propellers set in low pitch high rpm setting 3 While taxiing make slight turns to ascertain the effectiveness of steering 4 Observe wing clearances when taxiing near buildings or other stationary objects If possible station an individual outside the airplane as an observer 5 When taxiing on uneven ground look for and avoid holes and ruts 6 Do not operate the engine at high rpm duri...

Page 76: ...CHAPTER 10 PARKING AND MOORING 1E9 ...

Page 77: ...UBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY 10 10 00 PARKING AND MOORING 1E11 July 1 1993 10 10 00 Parking 1E11 July 1 1993 10 10 00 Locking Airplane 1E11 July 1 1993 10 20 00 Mooring 1E12 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 10 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 1E10 ...

Page 78: ... the handle To release the parking brakes pull back on the brake lever to disengage the catch mechanism Then allow the handle to swing forward NOTE Care should be taken when setting brakes that are overheated or during cold weather when accumulated moisture may freeze the brakes 3 The aileron and stabilator controls may be secured with the pilot s seat belt B Locking Airplane The right front cabin...

Page 79: ... aileron and stabilator controls by looping the pilot s seat belt around wheel CAUTION When using rope constructed of non synthetic material leave sufficient slack to avoid damage to the airplane when the ropes contract due to moisture 4 Secure tie down ropes to the wing tie down rings and the tail skid at approximately 45 degree angles to the ground NOTE Additional preparations for high winds inc...

Page 80: ...CHAPTER 11 REQUIRED PLACARDS 1E13 ...

Page 81: ...Y CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY 11 20 00 Exterior Plarcards and Markings 1E15 July 1 1993 11 30 00 Interior Plarcards and Markings 1E19 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32 R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 4 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 1E14 ...

Page 82: ...g the care of the airplane it is important to include the airplane serial number in any correspondence to Piper Aircraft Corporation Exterior Placards and Markings PA 32R 301 SP and PA 32R 301T SP Figure 1 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 11 20 00 Page 11 1 Reissued July 1 1993 1E15 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 19 20 21 18 17 16 14 15 11 10 2 12 13 NOTE Any time an airplane is rep...

Page 83: ...RADE 3 PLACARD NO STEP 4 PLACARD FLAP WARNING 5 PLACARD DOOR RELEASE 6 PLACARD NO STEP 7 DECAL AVGAS 8 PLACARD AVIATION FUEL GRADE 9 PLACARD DOOR RELEASE 10 PLACARD LIFT DETECTOR 11 PLACARD LEVEL POINTS 12 PLACARD PIPER AIRE 13 NAMEPLATE PIPER SARATOGA SP 14 PLACARD ELT LOCATION RIGHT SIDE 15 PLACARD EXTERNAL POWER LEFT SIDE 16 PLACARD DO NOT PUSH 17 PLACARD FUEL CHECK BOTTLE 18 PLACARD OLEO SERVI...

Page 84: ... arise concerning the care of the airplane it is important to include the airplane serial number in any correspondence to Piper Aircraft Corporation NOTE Any time an airplane is repainted or touched up inspect all placards to ensure that they are not covered with paint are legible and securely attached Exterior Placards and Markings PA 32R 301 II HP Figure 2 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 ...

Page 85: ...00 Page 11 4 Reissued July 1 1993 1E18 1 PLACARD NO STEP 2 PLACARD FLAP STEP UNSAFE 3 PLACARD DOOR RELEASE 4 PLACARD NO STEP 5 PLACARD AVGAS ONLY 6 PLACARD DOOR RELEASE 7 PLACARD AVGAS ONLY 8 PLACARD DO NOT PUSH 9 PLACARD FUEL CHECK BOTTLE 10 PLACARD OLEO SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS 11 PLACARD LEVEL POINT 12 PLACARD OLEO SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS 13 PLACARD TURN LIMIT 14 PLACARD TURN LIMIT CENTER MARK ...

Page 86: ... of 3 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 11 30 00 Page 11 5 Reissued July 1 1993 1E19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 1 6 17 18 22 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 28 30 1 9 2 0 2 1 23 29 3 1 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37 38 3 9 40 41 42 43 44 45 4 6 47 49 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 5 6 57 58 59 60 6 1 6 2 6 3 64 6 5 6 6 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 7 4 75 76 77 7 8 79 80 ...

Page 87: ...D OVERRIDE INSTRUCTIONS 13 PLACARD STABILATOR TRIM 14 PLACARD FLAP LEVER 15 PLACARD STORM WINDOW 16 PLACARD OPERATING LIMITATIONS 17 PLACARD OPEN 18 PLACARD LATCH 19 MEDALLION PIPER CONTROL WHEEL 20 PLACARD A P INTR 21 PLACARD TRANSPONDER IDENTIFIER 22 PLACARD LIGHT SWITCH 23 PLACARD BAGGAGE LIMITATIONS FORWARD 24 PLACARD RUDDER TRIM 25 PLACARD FUEL SELECTOR 26 PLACARD FUEL 27 PLACARD GO AROUND 28...

Page 88: ...ER 52 PLACARD LANDING AND RECOGNITION LIGHTS 53 PLACARD RADAR 54 PLACARD CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 55 PLACARD COMPASS SYSTEM 56 PLACARD CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 57 PLACARD AUTOPILOT 58 PLACARD ICE LIGHT 59 PLACARD PROP DEICE 60 PLACARD SURFACE BOOTS 61 PLACARD EMERGENCY BUS SWITCH 62 PLACARD NAVIGATION AND INSTRUMENT LIGHTS 63 PLACARD ALTERNATE AIR 64 PLACARD ALTITUDE LEANING 65 PLACARD WINDSHIELD PANEL ...

Page 89: ...r Placards and Markings PA 32R 301 II HP Figure 4 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 11 30 00 Page 11 8 Reissued July 1 1993 1E22 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 29 15 21 38 39 40 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34 36 37 39 40 41 13 14 35 ...

Page 90: ...ORM WINDOW 16 PLACARD DEMONSTRATED X WIND 17 PLATE N 18 PLACARD DAY NIGHT 19 PLACARD DO NOT EXCEED MANIFOLD PRESSURE 20 PLACARD PRESS TO TEST 21 PLACARD COMPASS DEVIATION 22 PLACARD HEAT DEF ON OFF 23 PLACARD CLIMATE CONTROL CENTER 24 PLACARD KLN 90 DATA LOADER 25 PLACARD FAN HI LOW OFF 26 PLACARD CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 27 PLACARD CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 28 PLACARD CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 29 PLACARD AL...

Page 91: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 11 30 00 Page 11 10 Reissued July 1 1993 1E24 ...

Page 92: ...CHAPTER 12 SERVICING 1F1 ...

Page 93: ...12 10 00 ENGINE LUBRICATION 1F9 July 1 1993 12 10 00 DRAINING OIL SUMP 1F9 July 1 1993 12 10 00 FILLING OIL SUMP 1F10 July 1 1993 12 10 00 OIL SCREEN SUCTION 1F10 July 1 1993 12 10 00 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CHANGING OIL 1F10 July 1 1993 12 10 00 OIL FILTER FULL FLOW 1F10 July 1 1993 12 10 00 LANDING GEAR 1F11 July 1 1993 12 10 00 SERVICING OLEO STRUTS 1F11 July 1 1993 12 10 00 FILLING NOSE GEAR OLEO ...

Page 94: ...nstructions 1G2 July 1 1993 12 20 00 Chart 3 Type of Lubricants 1G3 July 1 1993 12 20 00 Chart 4 Main Landing Gear 12 20 00 and Hydraulic System 1G4 July 1 1993 12 20 00 Chart 5 Nose Gear 1G5 July 1 1993 12 20 00 Chart 6 Control System 12 20 00 Sheet 1 of 3 1G6 July 1 1993 12 20 00 Chart 6 Control System 12 20 00 Sheet 2 of 3 1G7 July 1 1993 12 20 00 Chart 6 Control System 12 20 00 Sheet 3 of 3 1G...

Page 95: ...irt deposits have collected in order to clean them 3 Allow the solvent to remain on the engine from five to ten minutes then rinse the engine clean with additional solvent and allow to dry CAUTION Do not operate engine until excess solvent has evaporated or otherwise been removed 4 Remove the protective covers from the magnetos 5 Lubricate controls bearing surfaces etc per Lubrication Charts Refer...

Page 96: ...erosene d After cleaning plastic surfaces apply a thin coat of hard polishing wax Rub lightly with a soft cloth Do not use a circular motion e A severe scratch or mar in plastic can be removed by using jeweler s rouge to rub out the scratch Smooth both sides and apply wax f To improve visibility through windshield and windows during flight through rain a rain repellent such as REPCON should be app...

Page 97: ...e assembly a Place a pan under the gear to catch waste b Spray or brush the bear area with solvent or a mixture of solvent and degreaser c Allow the solvent to remain on the gear for five to ten minutes Rinse gear with additional solvent and allow to dry d Remove cover from wheel and remove the catch pan e Lubricate gear per Lubrication Chart Refer to 12 20 00 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTE...

Page 98: ... ENGINE OIL FILTER CARTRIDGE 5 ENGINE OIL FILLER INDICATOR 6 PROPELLER 7 NOSE GEAR LINK ASSEMBLY 8 NOSE GEAR TIRE 9 NOSE STRUT OLEO SHOCK FILLER 10 ENGINE OIL SUCTION SCREEN 11 BATTERY 12 BRAKE SYSTEM RESERVOIR 13 FUEL SELECTOR VALVE FILTER AND DRAIN 14 LEFT MAIN FUEL TANK DRAIN 15 MAIN GEAR OLEO SHOCK STRUT FILLER 16 MAIN TIRE 17 LEFT MAIN FUEL TANK FILLER 18 VACUUM REGULATOR AND CENTRAL AIR FILT...

Page 99: ...s C FILLING FUEL SYSTEM The fuel tanks of each wing are filled through filler necks located on the forward slope of the wings Each wing tank holds a capacity of 55 5 U S gallons Observe all required safety precautions for handling gasoline Fill the tanks with fuel as specified on the placard adjacent to the filler neck D DRAINING MOISTURE FROM FUEL SYSTEM The fuel system should be drained daily pr...

Page 100: ...dditive to the basic lubricant unless recommended by the engine manufacturer Engine oil level should be checked before each flight The engine oil and full flow cartridge filter should be changed every 50 hours of four months whichever occurs first If a screen type filter is used the screen filter and oil should be changed every 25 hours or four months whichever occurs first Refer to the latest rev...

Page 101: ... Service Instruction No 1014 and Lycoming Service Letter No L185 1 In engines that have been operating on straight mineral oil for several hundred hours a change to additive oil should be made with a degree of caution since the cleaning action of some additive oils will tend to loosen sludge deposits and cause plugged oil passages When an engine has been operating on straight mineral oil and is kn...

Page 102: ... 20995 C41 safety wire L LANDING GEAR The landing gear consists of tires brakes and oleo strut assemblies These should be inspected for proper gear extension scored piston tubes possible hydraulic fluid leakage and security and condition of all con nection points Check the brake linings for wear and frayed edges and brake discs for scoring Replace if necessary Minor servicing is described in the f...

Page 103: ... it be only the addition of a small amount or if the unit has been completely emptied and will required a large amount it should be filled as follows 1 Raise the airplane on jacks until the nose wheel is completely clear of the ground Refer to Chapter 7 2 Place a pan under the gear to catch spillage 3 If not previously accomplished remove the engine cowl and relieve air from the strut housing cham...

Page 104: ... 1 Raise the airplane on jacks until the main wheel is off the ground 2 Place a pan under the gear to catch spillage 3 If not previously accomplished remove a cap on top wing to gain access to top of strut housing Release air from strut housing chamber by removing cap from air valve and depressing valve core 4 Fill the main gear housing by one or two methods which are as follows a Method I 1 Remov...

Page 105: ... When using the extension method the aircraft should be fully serviced with fuel and engine oil and resting on its landing gear Inflate strut until correct inches of piston is exposed Rock aircraft several times to ascertain that gear settles back to the correct strut position If a strut pump is not available raise aircraft and use line pressure from a high pressure air system Lower aircraft and w...

Page 106: ...e vents When the loss rate exceeds 5 in 24 hours recheck for possible injuries Vents should remain open so check periodically to make sure they have not been covered over or closed by tire paint or spilled solvent And since vents may be covered during retreading check for evidence that your retreads have been revented Several basic characteristics of tubeless aircraft tires may be mistaken for pro...

Page 107: ... the opposite wheel half to assure reassembly in the same position Remove the wheel from the balance stand break it down and clean the inside of the tire with toluol Apply a coat of patch cement to both the patch and the inside center of the tire in line with the chalk marks When the cement has dried install the patches making certain they are on the center line of the tire and aligned with the ch...

Page 108: ...iller plug hole Should fluid be below the hole loosen the vent screw and add fluid MIL H 5606 through the filler hole until full Reinstall the filler plug X SERVICING ENGINE Regularly check the engine compartment for oil and fuel leaks chafing of lines loose wires and tightness of all parts Refer to Chapter 20 for cleaning the engine compartment Y ENGINE AIR FILTER Check induction air filter each ...

Page 109: ...n fasteners attaching filter box to induction air valve assembly 4 Install lower engine cowling Z SERVICING PROPELLER Inspect spinner back plate and propeller surfaces for nicks scratches corrosion and cracks Remove minor nicks and scratches per instructions in 61 10 00 Paint face of each blade with a flat paint to retard glare Wipe surfaces with a light oil or wax to prevent corrosion Inspect pro...

Page 110: ...ean water and dry 4 Place the cap over the battery box drain 5 Install battery AC ALTERNATE AIR DOOR The alternate door is located in the air induction box to provide a source of air to the engine should there be an air stoppage through the filter system The following should be checked during inspection 1 Check that air door seals are tight and that the hinge is secure 2 Check that when the cockpi...

Page 111: ...GRIDS 1F20 THROUGH 1F24 PAGES 12 17 THROUGH 12 20 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 12 10 00 Page 12 17 Reissued July 1 1993 1F20 ...

Page 112: ...caation of Grease When lubricating bearings and bearings surfaces with a grease gun ensure gun is filled with new clean grease of the grade specified for the particular application before applying lubricant to grease fittings 1 If a reservoir is not provided around a bearing apply lubricant sparingly and wipe off excess 2 Remove wheel bearings from the wheel hub and clean thoroughly with a suitabl...

Page 113: ...TER AND MILD DETERGENT AND DRY DO NOT BLOW OUT WITH COMPRESSED AIR DO NOT USE OIL REPLACE FILTER IF DAMAGED 4 WHEEL BEARINGS DISASSEMBLE AND CLEAN WITH A DRY TYPE SOLVENT ASCERTAIN THAT GREASE IS PACKED BETWEEN THE ROLLER AND CONE DO NOT PACK GREASE IN WHEEL HOUSING WHEEL BEAR INGS REQUIRE CLEANING AND REPACKING AFTER EXPOSURE TO AN ABNORMAL QUANTITY OF WATER 5 APPLY FLOUROCARBON DRY LUBRICANT TO ...

Page 114: ...TEMP HYDRAULIC FLUID PETROLEUM BASE MIL H 5606 GREASE AIRCRAFT AND INSTRUMENT GEAR MIL G 23827 TEXACO LOW TEMP AND ACTUATOR SCREW GREASE EP AEROSHELL GREASE 7 MOBIL GREASE 27 ROYCO 27A GREASE AIRCRAFT HIGH TEMPERATURE MIL G 3545C TEXACO MARFAX ALL PURPOSE GREASE MOBIL GREASE 77 OR MOBILUX EP2 SHELL ALVANIA EP GREASE 2 PARKER O RING LUBRICANT AERO LUBRIPLATE FISKE BROS REFINING CO FLUOROCARBON RELE...

Page 115: ...ctions on unit or container or refer to service manual COMPONENT LUBRICANT FREQUENCY 1 MAIN GEAR PIVOT POINTS MIL G 23827 100 HOURS 2 MAIN GEAR DOOR HINGE MIL L 7870 100 HOURS 3 MAIN GEAR TORQUE LINKS MIL L 7870 100 HOURS 4 EXPOSED MAINOLEO STRUT FLUOROCARBON RELEASE AGENT DRY LUBRICANT MS 122 MIL L 60326 100 HOURS 5 MAIN GEAR WHEEL BEARINGS TEXACO MARFAX ALL PURPOSE GREASE OR MOBILE GREASE 77 OR ...

Page 116: ...SE OR MO81L GREASE 77 OR MOBIL EP2 GREASE MIL G 35456 100 HOURS 7 NOSE GEAR DRAG LINK ASSEMBLIES MIL L 7870 100 HOURS 6 NOSE GEAR TORQUE LINK ASSEM8LY AND STRUT HOUSING MIL G 23827 100 HOURS 9 DOWNLOCK HOOK TENSION SPRING ARMS SHLIMMY DAMPENER AND ALIGNING ROLLER PIVOT POINTS MIL L 7870 100 HOURS 10 STEERING BELLCRANK PIVOT POINTS AND ROD ENDS MIL L 7870 100 HOURS 11 NOSE GEAR OLEO STRUT FILLER PO...

Page 117: ... FLAP HINGE BEARINGS MIL L 7870 100HRS 3 STABILATOR HINGE PINS MIL L 7870 100HRS 4 RUDDER HINGE BEARINGS MIL L 7870 100HRS 5 CONTROL CABLE PULLEYS MIL L 787 0 100HRS 6 TRIM CONTROL WHEEL MIL L 7870 100HRS 7 O RING CONTROL SHAFT BUSHING PARKER O RING LUBRICANT AS REQUIRED 8 TEE BAR PIVOT POINT MIL L 7 70 100HRS 9 CONTROL COLUMN CHAIN MIL L 7870 500HRS 10 CONTROLCOLUMN FLEX JOINTSANDSPROCKET MIL L 7...

Page 118: ...T FREQUENCY 1 FLAP TORQUE TUBE BEARING BLOCKS MIL L 7870 100HRS 2 FLAP CONTROL ROD END BEARINGS MIL L 7870 100HRS 3 FLAP HANDLE PIVOT POINT LOCK MECHANISM MIL L 7870 100HRS AND TURNBUCKLE ENDM MIL L 7870 100HRS 4 FLAP RETURN ANO TENSION CHAINS MIL L 7870 500HRS 5 AILERON BELLCRANK PIVOT POINTS MIL L 7870 100HRS 6 AILERON CONTROL ROD END BEARINGS MIL L 7870 100HRS 7 AILERON BELLCRANK CABLE ENDS MIL...

Page 119: ... BEARING BLOCKS FLUOROCARBON RELEASE AGENT DRY LUBRICANT MS 22 MIL L 60326 100 HRS 2 TOE BRAKE CYLINDER ATTACHMENTS MIL L 7870 100 HRS 3 RUDDER TUBE CONMNECTIONS MIL L 7870 100 HRS 4 BRAKE ROD ENDS MIL L 7870 100 HRS 6 STABILATOR TRIM SCREW AERO LUBRIPLATE OR MAG 1 FISKE BROS REFINING CO 100 HRS 7 STABILATOR SCREW TAB LINKS MIL L 7870 100 HRS 8 STABILATOR HINGE POINTS MIL L 7870 100 HRS 9 RUDDER T...

Page 120: ...ondenser Air Conditioning Condenser Figure 7 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 12 20 00 Page 12 29 Reissued July 1 1993 1G9 COMPONENT LUBRICANT FREQUENCY 1 CONDENSER HINGE AND ACTUATORS MIL L 7870 100 HR5 2 CONDENSER DOOR ACTUATING TRANSMISSION MIL G 23827 500 HR5 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 121: ... AGENT DRY LUBRICANT MS 122 MIL L 60326 50 HRS 3 DOOR LATCH MECHANISMS MIL L 7870 500 HRS 4 SEAT TRACK ROLLERS STOP PINS AN0 REAR SEAT AERO LUBRIPLATE OR LEG RETAINER CLIP AND CAM MAG 1 FISKE BROS REFINING CO MIL G 771 1 100 HRS 5 SEAT LATCH STOP PIVOR POINT CDPILDT MIL L 7870 100 HRS 2 3 2 3 2 1 4 S TOP S HOULD BE LUBRI CA TED A N FRE E TO SW I VE L W I THO UT E XCE S SI V E PLA Y 5 SPECIAL INSTR...

Page 122: ...3827 100 HRS 5 ENGINE CONTROL AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL PIVOT POINTS MIL L 7870 100 HRS 6 FRESH AIR VENT SHAFTS MIL G 7711 500 HRS 7 ALTERNATOR IDLER PULLEY BEARING MIL G 81322 100 HRS 2 3 A B 5 1 6 7 SKETCH B 4 SKETCH A SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 1 AIR FILTER TOCLEAN FILTER TAP GENTLYTO REMOVE DIRT PARTICLES DO NOT BLOW OUT WITH COMPRESSED AIR OR USE OIL REPLACE FILTER IF PUNCTURED OR DAMAGED 2 INTERVA...

Page 123: ... LINKS AND CONTROL ARM PIVOT POINTS MIL L 7870 100 HRS 3 BACK UP EXTENDER SPRLNG ATTACHMENT POINTS MIL L 7870 100 HRS 4 FUEL SELECTOR LINKAGE MIL L 7870 100 HRS 5 FUEL SELECTOR VALVE COVER PLATE FLUOROCARBON RELEASE AGENT DRY LUBRICANT MS 122 MIL L 60326 100 HRS 1 2 2 3 3 TYPICA L 4 5 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 1 Diaphragm shaft and bushing soft film silicon compound MIL C 215667 is recommended for use ...

Page 124: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 12 20 00 Page 12 33 Reissued July 1 1993 1G13 ...

Page 125: ...GRIDS 1G14 THROUGH 1G16 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 12 20 00 Page 12 34 Reissued July 1 1993 1G14 ...

Page 126: ...CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES AIRFRAME 1G17 ...

Page 127: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 128: ...es 1G19 July 1 1993 20 00 00 Method For Installing Rod End Bearings 1G20 July 1 1993 20 00 00 Removing Cherrylock Rivet 1G21 July 1 1993 20 00 00 Identification of Fluid Lines 1G22 July 1 1993 20 00 00 Flareless Tube Assemblies 1G22 July 1 1993 20 00 00 Electrical Bonding 1H1 July 1 1993 20 00 00 Support Clamps 1H2 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 20 Cont Effec Page 1 ...

Page 129: ...y instructions furnished by the manufacturer must be followed explicitly When it is necessary to use a special extension or adapter wrench together with a torque wrench a simple mathematical equation must be worked out to arrive at the correct torque reading Following is the formula to be used Refer to Figure 1 T Torque desired at the part A Basic lever length from center of wrench shank to center...

Page 130: ...lling Rod End Bearings Installing Rod End Bearings Figure 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 20 00 00 Page 20 2 Reissued July 1 1993 1G20 T B A 90 C DAMAGE HERE DAMAGE HERE WRONG IMPROPER TOOL RESULTING IN LOCKED BALL ONLY CORRECT METHOD A SPECIAL WRENCH MAY BE REQUIRED WITH A LONG THROAT ...

Page 131: ...ock Use a small center drill bit on top of the rivet stem to provide a guide for a larger bit See Figure 3 Views 2 and 3 3 Pry remainder of locking collar out of rivet head with a drift pin See Figure 3 View 3 4 Drill almost but not completely through head of rivet Use a drill bit the same size as the rivet shank See Figure 3 View 4 5 Use a drift pin as a lever to break off rivet head See Figure 3...

Page 132: ... to installing a new flareless tube assembly Presetting is performed as follows 1 Cut tube to correct length Ensure ends are perfectly square Deburr inside and outside of tube Slip nut then sleeve over the tube refer to Figure 5 step 1 page 20 6 2 Lubricate fitting and nut threads as specified in table contained in Figure 5 page 20 6 3 Place fitting in a vise refer to Figure 5 step 2 page 20 6 Hol...

Page 133: ...RS AND STRIPE M M M Mf f f fg g g g S S S Sy y y ym m m mb b b bo o o ol l l l WHITE M MI IL L H H 7 79 93 38 8 S Si iz ze e 3 3 4 4 6 68 8 RED NUMERALS AND LETTERS D FLAME AROMATIC AND OIL RESISTANT HOSE E SELF SEALING AROMATIC RESISTANT HOSE AR 194 HOSE IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS ORANGE GRAY BLUE YELLOW ORANGE GRAY ORANGE BROWN DE ICING DE ICING DE ICING HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC AIR INSTRUMENT...

Page 134: ...UTTING EDGE BODY NUT FLARELESS TUBE FITTING TUBE FITTING SLEEVE PILOT SLEEVE TUBE NUT TUBE SLEEVE CUTTING EDGE STEP 1 3 32 TO 1 8 INCH STEP 3 SLIGHT DEFORMATION PERM IS SIBLE 005 INCH MAXIMUM ALUMINUM ALLOY TUBING 015 INCH MAXIMUM CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL TUBING STEP 2 TUBING SYSTEM LUBRICANT HYDRAULIC MIL H 5606 FUEL MIL H 5606 OIL SYSTEM OIL PNEUMATIC MIL L 4343 1 OXYGEN MIL T 5542 1 CAUTION DO...

Page 135: ... of the bonded joint All nuts used in bonding shall be of the self locking type Do Not use fiber locking type All electrical bonding shall be accomplished without affecting the structural integrity of the airframe Bond connections shall be secure and free from corrosion Self Tapping Screws will not be used for bonding purposes CHART 1 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE RESISTANCE VALUES PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 3...

Page 136: ...ushion materials Use bonded clamps to secure metal hydraulic fuel and oil lines in place Unbonded clamps should be used only for securing wiring Remove any paint or anodizing from the portion of the tube at the bonding clap location Make certain that clamps are of the correct size Clamps or supporting clips smaller than the outside diameter of the hose may restrict the flow of fluid through the ho...

Page 137: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 20 00 00 Page 20 9 Reissued July 1 1993 1H3 ...

Page 138: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 20 00 00 Page 20 10 Reissued July 1 1993 1H4 ...

Page 139: ...CHAPTER 21 ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS 1H5 ...

Page 140: ...July 1 1993 21 50 00 Special Servicing Procedures 1I1 July 1 1993 21 50 00 General Refrigeration System Procedures 1I1 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Service Valves 1I2 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Service Valve Replacement 1I3 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Test Gauge Manifold Set 1I4 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Checking the System for Leaks 1I6 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Leak Check Method One 1I6 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Leak Check Method ...

Page 141: ...0 Installation 1I20 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Condenser Door Actuator 1I21 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Condenser Assembly 1I22 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Condenser Assembly Rigging 1I22 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Expansion Valve 1I22 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Removal 1I23 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Installation 1I23 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Evaporator 1I23 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Removal 1I23 July 1 1993 21 50 00 Installation 1I24 July 1 ...

Page 142: ...s chapter contains instructions for operating servicing inspection and repair of the Environmental System components installed in this airplane PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 00 00 Page 21 1 Reissued July 1 1993 1H8 ...

Page 143: ...PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 00 00 Page 21 2 Reissued July 1 1993 1H9 ...

Page 144: ...hut off valves at the fire wall and then to the defroster outlets The airflow is regulated by a defroster control located below the heat control To aid air distribution the cabin air is exhausted overboard by an outlet located on the bottom of the fuselage Cabin exhaust outlets are located below and aft of the rear seats B Heater Maintenance If the exhaust manifold should become defective carbon m...

Page 145: ...2R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 40 00 Page 21 4 Reissued July 1 1993 1H11 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 10 6 8 6 10 11 12 1 2 1 HEAT SHROUD 2 DEFROSTER VALVE 3 DEFROSTER OUTLET 4 HEAT AND DEFROSTER AIR CONTROLS 5 OVERHEAD FRESH AIR CONTROLS 6 FRESH AIR OUTLET 7 OVERHEAD VENT BLOWER 8 FRESH AIR INLET 9 AIR BOX 10 CABIN HEAT OUTLET 11 CABIN SIR EXHAUST 12 DRAIN TUBE ...

Page 146: ...301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 40 00 Page 21 5 Reissued July 1 1993 1H12 1 12 9 10 6 10 6 8 6 7 8 11 2 3 4 5 1 HEAT SHROUD 2 DEFROSTER VALVE 3 DEFROSTER OUTLET 4 HEAT AND DEFROSTER AIR CONTROLS 5 OVERHEAD FRESH AIR DUCT 6 FRESH AIR OUTLET 7 OVERHEAD VENT BLOWER 8 FRESH AIR INLET 9 AIR BOX 10 CABIN HEAT OUTLET 11 CABIN AIR EXHAUST 12 CONTROL CABLE HEAT SHIELD ...

Page 147: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 40 00 Page 21 6 Reissued July 1 1993 1H13 ...

Page 148: ...y to the retainer and hangers f Remove the blower assembly from the aircraft 3 Disassembly of Vent Blower a Remove the hose duct from the forward edge of the blower assembly by removing the nuts washers and screws b Remove the cover from the blower assembly by removing the nuts washers and screws c Remove the blower fan from the motor shaft by removing the set screw d For removal of the motor proc...

Page 149: ...ect plug and receptacles to blower f Check blower for proper operation g Install access door to aft wall of baggage area Secure with attaching hardware Chart 6 Blower System Wire Color Codes NOTE Pin number 1 is at pointed side of plug and receptacle PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 50 00 Page 21 8 Reissued July 1 1993 1H15 MOTOR WIRES AIRCRAFT WIRES YY75062 Pin ESB Universal A...

Page 150: ...RESSOR AND ALTERNATOR ASS Y SEE SKETCH FREON LINES EVAPORATEOR AND DUCT SEE SKETCH B CONDENSER SEE SKETCH C 12 13 14 SKETCH C 5 6 7 8 9 SKETCH B 10 11 1 COMPRESSOR 2 FREON LINES 3 ALTERNATOR 4 PULLEY POSITIONS 5 DUCT ASSEMBLY 6 EVAPORATOR FILTER AND COVER 7 EXPANSION VALVE 8 PRESSURE SWITCH 9 RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR 10 EVAPORATOR 11 BLOWER MOTOR 12 CONDENSER 13 COVER ASSEMBLY 14 BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY ...

Page 151: ...its take off flight conditions During maximum power demands the compressor is de clutched and the condenser door is automatically retracted The air conditioning system in this aircraft is a recirculating independent unit It filters dehumidifies and cools the air as it cycles through the evaporator The unit is operated from controls mounted on the right side of the instrument panel The air conditio...

Page 152: ...rigerant Air in system Check for leaks Bleed charge from system Evacuate and recharge system Overheated condenser due to Clean bugs and dirt from blocking air passage condenser fins Straighten fins if bent Flooded evaporator indicated by Check that capillary bulb is heavy frosting on suction line securely clamped to suction and compressor suction service line If capillary bulb OK valve replace exp...

Page 153: ...stuck closed or capillary by holding in hand capillary bulb has lost its charge If suction pressure does not charge replace expansion valve Restriction anywhere in liquid Locate restriction and repair line Restriction will show frost High suction pressure Capillary bulb clamp loose on Clean contact surfaces of suction line Suction line shows suction line and cap bulb frost Tighten clamp Expansion ...

Page 154: ...ed replace if inoperative Thermostat sensing element Check thermostat and cabin defective comfort control panel Blower motor disconnected Check current flow to blower or burned out motor Repair or replace if inoperative Mechanical Loose or broken drive belt Replace drive belts and or tighten to specifications Compressor partially or Remove compressor for completely frozen service or replacement Ex...

Page 155: ...as necessary Insufficient air circulation Clean condenser coils over condenser coils fins clogged with dirt or bugs Evaporator filter clogged Clean with cleaning solvent to remove cigarette tars Refrigeration Insufficient refrigerant in Recharge system until bubbles system disappear in receiver dehydrator and gauge readings stabilize to specifications Clogged screen in expansion Purge system and r...

Page 156: ...echanical Loose or excessively worn Tighten or replace as required drive belts Noisy clutch Remove clutch for service or replacement as necessary Compressor noisy Check mountings and repair as required Remove compressor for service or replacement Compressor oil level low Fill with correct amount of specified oil Refrigeration Excessive charge in system Discharge excess freon until high pressure ga...

Page 157: ... to 25 F NOTE For each 1 000 feet of elevation above sea level the gauge readings will be about one inch of mercury or 1 2 psi higher than the chart indicates It must be pointed out that the actual temperature of the air passing over the coils of the evaporator will be several degrees warmer allowing for a temperature rise caused by the loss in the fins and tubing of the evaporator The importance ...

Page 158: ...ssure Evaporator High Pressure Ambient Gauge Reading Temperature Gauge Reading Temperature p s i F p s i F 0 0 21 72 40 2 4 15 86 50 4 5 10 105 60 10 1 2 109 62 11 2 4 113 64 12 3 6 117 66 13 4 8 122 68 14 6 10 126 70 15 8 12 129 71 17 1 14 132 72 18 3 16 134 73 19 7 18 137 74 21 0 20 140 75 22 4 22 144 76 23 1 23 148 77 23 8 24 152 78 24 6 25 156 79 25 3 26 160 80 26 1 27 162 81 26 8 28 165 82 27...

Page 159: ...EYE 2 Splash large quantities of cool water into the eye to raise the temperature 3 Tape on an eye patch to avoid the possibility of dirt entering the eye 4 Rush to a physician or hospital for immediate professional aid 5 DO NOT ATTEMPT TO TREAT IT YOURSELF c If liquid R 12 strikes the skin frostbite can occur Treat with cool water and protect with petroleum jelly d Do not discharge large quantiti...

Page 160: ...t contains A new receiver dehydrator should be opened and connected to the system only when ready to charge the system with refrigerant i Recommended torque values must be used on all flare fitting and O ring joints Refer to Chart 3 CHART 3 ALUMINUM TUBING TORQUE G Service Valves The purpose of the service valve is to service the air conditioning system Testing Bleeding Evacuating and Charging Thi...

Page 161: ...g aft and secure with 0 312 bolts Torque to 15 to 23 inch pounds NOTE Whenever the air conditioning refrigerant lines or system is opened for any reason cap and seal line immediately to prevent dirt and other contaminants from entering the system Do not place plugs into the hoses or fittings PIPERAIRCRAFT PA 32 R 301 301T MAINTENANCEMANUAL 21 50 00 Page21 20 Reissued July 1 1993 1I3 COMPRESSOR VAL...

Page 162: ...for charging or evacuation procedures or any other service that may be necessary Both the high and low pressure sides of the manifold have hand shut off valves When the hand valve is turned clockwise all the way in the manifold is closed The pressures on that side of the system will be recorded on the gauge above the hose Cracking the hand valve in a clockwise direction opens the system to the mid...

Page 163: ...Manifold Set Operation Figure 5 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 50 00 Page 21 22 Reissued July 1 1993 1I5 L H CLOSED CLOSED OFF DIAGRAM A L CRACKED H CLOSED H DIAGRAM B L CRACKED H L CLOSED CRACKED DIAGRAM C CRACKED DIAGRAM D ...

Page 164: ... b Purge the hoses of air by allowing some refrigerant to escape from connections at the service valves Then tighten connections at the service valve c Close low side manifold valve and open high side manifold valve d Open the refrigerant container service valve and allow the pressure at the low side gauge to reach 50 psi at which time close the high side manifold valve e Close the refrigerant con...

Page 165: ...llowing a slight amount of refrigerant gas to escape from the Schrader valve fitting d The cylinder of refrigerant should be placed upright in a container of warm 125F max water on a small scale e Allow approximately 1 2 pound of refrigerant to enter the system by opening the valve on the charging hose and observing the weight change on the scale f Using an electronic leak detector check all joint...

Page 166: ...ted in a discharged condition or the system has been open to atmospheric pressure the receiver dehydrator must be replaced and the system evacuated to remove any trapped air and moisture Use a vacuum pump capable of pulling 29 inches of mercury or better As the pressure in the air conditioning system is lowered the boiling temperature of any water mois ture in the system is lowered The water can t...

Page 167: ...mp for 25 minutes after low pressure gauge indicates 26 to 28 inches of vacuum 7 If system cannot maintain 26 to 28 inches of vacuum close both manifold hand valves and observe compound gauge 8 If the compound gauge show loss of vacuum there is a leak in the system which must be repaired before continuing with evacuation 9 If no leaks are evident reopen both manifold hand valves and continue the e...

Page 168: ...igerant tank Be sure top valve is fully closed PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 50 00 Page 21 27 Reissued July 1 1993 1I10 1 9 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 19 18 20 23 21 22 24 25 31 26 27 29 28 30 1 CYLINDER PRESSURE GAUGE 2 COMPOUND GAUGE 3 VALVE LOW PRESSURE CONTROL 4 VALVE VACUUM CONTROL 5 CHARGING CYLINDER 6 BRACKET 7 SIGHT GLASS 8 CYLINDER BASE VALVE 9 HIGH PRESS...

Page 169: ...and any access panels previously removed 2 Using the airplane compressor to charge system This method is least desirable due to requirement of operating airplane s engine to run compressor CAUTION Ensure area around airplane is clean and a qualified person is at the controls of the airplane a With system evacuated connect refrigerant charging hose to manifold and purge the charging hose of air Ref...

Page 170: ...conditioning system and airplane engine Remove charging lines from Schrader valves with care due to the refrigerant remaining in hose NOTE A shop cloth should be used to divert escaping refrigerant when disconnecting the charging hose from the Schrader valve Recap the valve Charging Hookup Figure 9 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 50 00 Page 21 29 Reissued July 1 1993 1I12 DISC...

Page 171: ...d an additional 1 4 pound of refrigerant to system Engine should be operating at 1000 RPM NOTE Perform procedures above with 70 F OAT or higher and with air conditioner operating 11 Shut off air conditioner and engine Remove charging hose from Schrader valve with care Some residual refrigerant will remain in line 12 Install access panels O Component Service CAUTION Cleanliness and care must be exe...

Page 172: ...ne mounting brackets 3 Compressor Installation a Place compressor to mounting brackets Install the six bolts and progressively torque to 14 17 foot pounds Safety all bolts with 032 safety wire b Check oil level in compressor in accordance with instructions given in Checking Compressor Oil CAUTION Do not force the belt into the pulley sheave If necessary remove the idler assembly c Place drive belt...

Page 173: ...art 5 to determine the amount of oil in the crankcase CAUTION A 10 ounce oil level is required in compressors installed on new systems Some oil is distributed in the system during operation Replacement compressors should be charged with 10 ounces of oil f Do not operate compressor with less than 6 ounces of oil When adding oil level must not go above 10 ounces Piper refrigerant oil PMS L2000 or eq...

Page 174: ...de of ring gear Measure distance between straight edge to forward edge of belt at compressor pulley Refer to Figure 11 View B Point B NOTE Insure adequate ring gear surface contact to provide a solid base for the straightedge 3 Measure distance between straight edge to forward edge of belt at compressor idler pulley Refer to Figure 11 View B Point A 4 Difference in distance measured at point A mus...

Page 175: ...IEW D NOMINAL DISTANCE FOR COMPRESSOR BELT ALIGNMENT A L I G N M EN T D I M EN S I ON C H E C K DA TU M LI NE FOR WA RD SU RF AC E OF R IN G GEA R STR AI GHT ED GE 1 2 3 VIEW A FWD SEE VIEW C 4 5 STRAIGHT EDGE POINT A POIN T B 6 VIEW B ADD OR REMOVE SHIMS P N 62833 83 AS REQUIRED FOR PROPER COMPRESSOR BELT ALIGNMENT SAFETY WIRE VIEW C 1 COMPRESSOR 2 ALTERNATOR 3 RING GEAR 4 RING GEAR 5 COMPRESSOR ...

Page 176: ... safety j Install any previously removed engine baffles and engine cowling 6 Magnetic Clutch Removal Refer to Figure 12 a Remove compressor pulley 1 Remove self locking capscrew and washer securing pulley to compressor shaft CAUTION Do not use a wheel puller on the outer flange of the pulley This can damage the pulley grooves or clutch bearings 2 Remove pulley assembly by applying force on the end...

Page 177: ... noise h If interference is detected rotor pulley assembly must be removed and field assembly mount ing adjusted until interference is eliminated P Refrigerant Lines and Routing Refrigerant lines are flexible high pressure hoses that should be handled accordingly Refrigerant hoses in the power plant area are routed to provide maximum protection from heat and abrasion They couple at the firewall to...

Page 178: ...ends g Support condenser assembly Remove bolt attaching actuating rod to condenser assembly h Lower aft end of assembly on piano hinge at forward end of assembly i Remove eight screws attaching piano hinge to condenser frame assembly Remove frame assembly from aircraft j Remove condenser core from frame assembly by removing screws in side mounting frame 2 Installation Refer to Figure 13 a Install ...

Page 179: ...ser Door Installation Figure 13 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 50 00 Page 21 38 Reissued July 1 1993 1I21 NOTES 1 WITH DOOR FULLY CLOSED ADJUST CLOSED UP LIMIT SWITCH SO THAT THE ACTUATOR TRAVELS AN ADDITIONAL 0 12 INCH PRELOAD AFTER DOOR IS FULLY CLOSED ADJUST OPEN LIMIT SWITCH TO PROVIDE DOOR OPENING OF 5 00 INCHES 2 SEAL ALL AROUND FROWARD AND AFT COVERS WITH PERMAGUM BEAD...

Page 180: ... trailing edge of the door at instant forward edge of door becomes flush with fuselage skin c To preload mechanism after door is fully closed adjust CLOSED limit switch so that the actuator travels an additional 0 12 of an inch Refer to Figure 13 d Cycle assembly several times to ensure proper operation without binding U Expansion Valve The expansion valve is located in the evaporator assembly bet...

Page 181: ...fabricated of thermoplastic material Condensed moisture is dumped overboard through a hose clamped to a fitting on the bottom of the evaporator housing The evaporator assembly is located behind the cabin rear panel attached to the mounting panel with 12 screws and washers and a bracket securing the back to the mounting panel 1 Removal a Remove air conditioning filter cover filter and rear access p...

Page 182: ... flexible air duct and drain tube i Make and check electrical connections Refer to Figure 21 17 j Check operation of blower and refrigerant systems WARNING Whenever it is necessary to remove and replace cabin rear panel it musty be replaced and sealed in original manner If not due to lower pressure in cabin exhaust gases may seep into cabin k Install and seal rear bulkhead panels l Perform ground ...

Page 183: ... and below the throttle arm Adjust switch so it will actuate at the last quarter inch of full open throttle travel Position switch so throttle arm contacts center of switch actuator button Z Fuse Replacement There are three fuses located behind the air conditioning system control panel A 20 amp circuit breaker mounted in the circuit breaker panel protects the complete air conditioning electrical s...

Page 184: ...LAY FAN SW S7 N C AC2 1A AC2D AC2A 5 K3 4 F3 5A AC1D AC1E AIR COND SW AC2B AC3A THROTTLE SW S2 ON CLOSE RELAY 5 4 3 2 1 K2 AC1 9B AC3A AC15 AC2B T H RO T T L E SW AIR COND SW S2 ON AC17 AC3B S3 N O N C S4 A C3C AC4 C AC4B COMPRESSOR CLUTCH THERMOSTAT S6 S5 PRESS SW AC3B AC2 0A AC4A N O N C S4 S3 4 3 N O N C 5 OPEN RELAY OPEN LIMIT SW DOOR MOTOR M K1 1 2 SHO WN WIT H AIR CONDIT IONING F AN SWIT CH ...

Page 185: ...26A AC10A AC1C 1 4 V B U S CBI 20A AC1A FAN SWITCH L H AC2A F2 5A LO OFF HIGH 5A F1 AC2B ON AC3A AC15 THROTTLE SWITCH C NC AC17 S3 NO AIR COND SW AC2D 5 4 AC3C DOOR OPEN ANNUNCIATOR REF 0PEN LIMIT SW AC20A AC1E 3 4 NC NO C AC3B AC4A S5 PRESS SW P AC4B THERMOSTAT AC1D S6 1 5 DOOR MOTOR 2 K1 DOR OPEN RELAY AIR COND DOOR AC19B AC21A 2 1 K2 3 4 DOOR CLOSE RELAY 5 COMPRESSOR CLUTCH NC S7 NO P3A J3A 8 8...

Page 186: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLAN PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 50 00 Page 21 45 Reissued July 1 1993 1J4 ...

Page 187: ...GRIDS IJ5 THROUGH 1J6 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 21 50 00 Page 21 46 Reissued July 1 1993 1J5 ...

Page 188: ...CHAPTER 22 AUTOFLIGHT 1J7 ...

Page 189: ...ECTIVITY 22 00 00 AUTO FLIGHT 11J9 July 1 1993 22 00 00 General 11J9 July 1 1993 22 00 00 Non Piper A F C S Equipment Contacts 11J9 July 1 1993 22 00 00 Piper A F C S Equipment 1J10 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 22 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 1J8 ...

Page 190: ...rature 1 Bendix Avionics Division 2100 N W 62nd Street Fort Lauderdale Florida 33310 305 776 4100 TWX 5109559884 2 Collins General Aviation Division Rockwell International Cedar Rapids Iowa 52498 319 395 4648 Telex 464 421 3 Edo Corporation Avionics Division Box 610 Municipal Airport Mineral Wells Texas 76067 817 325 2517 Telex 76067 4 King Radio Corporation P O Box 106 400 North Rodgers Road Olat...

Page 191: ... faceplate model name in order to consult the appropriate service manual Each manual identifies the revision level and revision status as called out on the Master Parts Price List Aerofiche published monthly by Piper Consult the aircraft s parts catalog for replacement parts NAME PIPER PART NO AutoControl I II Altimatic I II 753 798 AutoControl III and Altimatic III and IIIB 753 723 AutoControl II...

Page 192: ...PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 22 00 00 Page 22 3 Reissued July 1 1993 1J11 ...

Page 193: ...CHAPTER 23 COMMUNICATIONS 1J12 ...

Page 194: ...July 1 1993 23 20 00 Narco ELT 10 23 20 00 Battery Removal and Installation ELT 10 1J16 July 1 1993 23 20 00 Testing Emergency Locator Transmitter ELT 10 1J18 July 1 1993 23 20 00 Description Operation and Testing of Pilot s Remote Switch ELT 10 and ELT 910 1J20 July 1 1993 23 20 00 Narco ELT 910 1J20 23 20 00 Battery Removal and Installation ELT 910 1J20 July 1 1993 23 20 00 Testing Emergency Loc...

Page 195: ...lied by its own self contained battery The battery must be replaced on or before the replacement date marked on battery pack label The battery must also be replaced any time it has been used in an emergency situation or after more than one hour of accumulated test time AVIONICS MASTER SWITCHING A PA32R 301 SP and 32R 301T SP Avionics Master an Emergency Switch Circuit PA32R 301 SP 32R 301T SP Figu...

Page 196: ...HP Figure 1 Sheet 2 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 23 00 00 Page 23 2 Reissued July 1 1993 1J15 PR1A 10 PR2A 2 1 3 4 5 20 AVIONICS MASTER RELAY PR2B 20 PR1B 10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM BUS AVIONICS BUS OFF ON AVIONICS MASTER SW PRIA 20 PR2A PR2B PR1B AVIONICS MASTER RELAY 1983 MODELS X1 X2 ...

Page 197: ...switch on the transmitter to OFF c Disconnect antenna coaxial cable from ELT d Remove ELT from its mounting bracket by releasing the latch on the strap and sliding the ELT off the bracket e Extend the portable antenna Refer to Figure 2 f Unscrew the four screws that hold the control head to the battery casing and slide apart g Disconnect the battery terminals from the bottom of the circuit board h...

Page 198: ...NTENNA BLADE TOUCHES PORTABLE FINGER CONTACT ANTENNA EXTENSION TAB NOTCH PIN STOP PORTABLE ANTENNA OPERATIVE BUT STORED VIEW A VIEW B PULL TAB TO EXTEND FULL LENGTH ANTENNA POPS OUT OF CHANNEL AND DOWN ANTENNA EXTENSION TAB SET ON OFF ARM SWITCH TO ON PIN STOP VIEW C LATCH PORTABLE ANTENNA CONTACT FINGER CONTACT SEPARATOR PORTAVLE ANTENNA BLADE NOT MAKING CONTACT FIXED AMTENNA S CABLE CONNECTOR AN...

Page 199: ... NOTE Inspect the external whip antenna for any damage Avoid bending the whip Any sharply bent or kinked whip should be replaced Antenna damage may cause structural failure of whip in flight 2 Testing Emergency Locator Transmitter ELT 10 Conduct E L T tests in a screen room or metal enclosure to ensure that electromagnetic energy is not radiated during testing If a shielded enclosure is not availa...

Page 200: ...r and or control tower or FAA Flight Service Station During cold weather there may be a slight delay before transmission occurs 6 A properly functioning transmitter emits a characteristic downward swept tone 7 When test is completed ensure transmitter ON ARM OFF or ON ARM switch is in the ARM position NOTE Whenever unit is checked by moving transmitter ON ARM OFF switch from the ARM to ON position...

Page 201: ...foam together and remove old battery pack k Install new battery pack in foam jacket Tape foam halves together with a good quality glass filament tape l Install battery pack assembly into ELT Plug connector into circuit board m Slide the two unit section together Ensure red gasket in header is sitting flat n Secure with 8 new screws provided with replacement battery Ensure all 8 screws are snugged ...

Page 202: ...4 If aircraft is not fitted with a communications receiver request the nearest FAA facility to listen for E L T signal 5 Set ON ARM OFF switch on the transmitter to the ON position for approximately 2 seconds Return to OFF then ARM position 6 Test transmission should be received by aircraft communications receiver and or FAA facility During cold weather there may be a slight delay before transmiss...

Page 203: ...CHAPTER 24 ELECTRICAL POWER 1J22 ...

Page 204: ...1K15 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Testing Alternator 1K17 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Checking Alternator Belt Tension 1K18 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Slip Torque Method 1K18 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Deflection Method 1K18 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Prestolite Alternator Belt Tension 1K19 July 1 1993 24 30 00 90 Amp Ford Alternator System 1K19 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Description of Alternator 1K19 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Precautions ...

Page 205: ... 24 30 00 Adjusting Alternator Belt Tension 1L16 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Battery Service 1L16 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Battery Removal 1L17 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Battery Installation 1L17 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Testing Battery 1L17 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Battery Charging 1L18 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Battery Corrosion Prevention 1L18 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Checking Voltage Regulator 1L19 July 1 1993 24 30 00 Checki...

Page 206: ...ting and as a reserve power source in case of alternator failure The battery and alternator are both connected to the bus bar from which all electrical equipment is powered with the exception of the starter which receives its power from the load side of the battery The master switch controls the battery relay and field circuit The master switch must be on before any electrical equipment will opera...

Page 207: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 00 00 Page 24 2 Reissued July 1 1993 1K2 ...

Page 208: ...et 1 of 5 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 3 Reissued July 1 1993 1K3 Trouble Cause Remedy Zero output indicated Open field circuit With the battery switch turned on ammeter regardless on check for battery voltage of rpm refer to from the airplane s main bus alternator system test through the entire field circuit procedure to the alternator field terminal Measure ...

Page 209: ...se points isolates the faulty component or wire which must be replaced See wiring schematic Chapter 91 Open circuit in alternator output will usually burn out ALT annunciator and the 50 ohm resistor Check 5 0 amp in line fuse Open field winding Disconnect field terminal of in alternator alternator from field wiring and check for continuity from field terminal to ground with ohmmeter 20 100 ohms de...

Page 210: ...egulator High resistance connections Check visually for loose in field or output circuit binding posts at the various junction points in system alternator battery post lugs on ammeter connections at voltage regulator circuit breaker etc See wiring schematic Chapter 91 Examine crimped terminal ends for signs of deterioration at crimp or strands of broken wire at crimp Tighten any loose binding post...

Page 211: ... defective See wiring schematic Chapter 91 Short circuit in field Disconnect field wiring at winding of alternator terminal of alternator Turn on master switch Set breaker and if breaker fails to trip this isolates short circuit to field of alternator itself Check brush holders for shorting against frame If there are no obvious signs of a physical short circuit at field terminal or brush holder re...

Page 212: ...sing a short to ground Check other wiring for chafing etc Excessive ammeter Excessive resistance Check all connections and fluctuation in field circuit wire terminals in field circuit for deterioration such as loose binding posts broken wire strands at terminals etc Tighten all connections and replace faulty terminals High field circuit If problem persists jump resistance across the terminals of t...

Page 213: ...e protection Three positive rectifiers are mounted in the rectifier mounting plate The three negative rectifiers are mounted in the slip ring end head Each pair of rectifiers is connected to a stator lead with high temperature solder Stator leads are anchored to the rectifier mounting plate with epoxy cement for vibration protection d The stator contains a special lead which is connected to the ce...

Page 214: ...ion is required Any polarization attempt may result in damage to alternator regulator or circuits f If booster battery or fast charger is used its polarity must be connected correctly to prevent damage to electrical system components NOTE If a solderless terminal on an aluminum cable is loose corrod ed or otherwise unsatisfactory it is recommended that the complete cable assembly be replaced inste...

Page 215: ...taining nut to 35 foot pounds 4 Checking Alternator System With all electrical equipment off except master switch the ammeter will indicate the amount of charging current demanded by the battery This amount will vary depending on the percentage of charge in the battery at the time As the battery becomes charged the amount of current displayed on the ammeter will reduce to approximately two amperes...

Page 216: ...ch on the following loads and observe the ammeter output increase as indicated 1 Rotating beacon 3 to 6 amps 2 Navigation and instrument lights bright position 4 to 6 amps 3 Landing light 7 to 9 amps If alternator does not meet above indications refer to troubleshooting Chart 1 Follow trou bleshooting procedure outlined on the chart in a step by step fashion checking each cause and iso lation proc...

Page 217: ...or In some cases it will only be necessary to perform those operations which are required to effect the repair However in this section the complete overhaul is covered step by step to provide detailed information on each operation In actual service practice use only the required operations a Disassembly of Alternator 1 Remove two Number 10 24 screws holding brush holder assembly in slip ring end h...

Page 218: ...ng on shaft as this may result in distortion of end head or stripping of retainer plate screws Remove three retainer plate screws and press bearing out of end head Refer to Figure 8 Removal of Slip Ring End Bearing Removal of Rectifier Figure 5 Figure 6 Removal of Drive End Head Removal of End Head Bearing Figure 7 Figure 8 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 13 Reis...

Page 219: ...d pinpoint open or shorted rectifiers with out going through the operation of disconnecting the stator leads However if a tester is not available test probes and a No 57 bulb connected in series with a 12 volt battery can be used in the following manner Touch one test probe to a rectifier heat sink and the other test probe to a lead from one of the rectifiers in that heat sink Then reverse the pos...

Page 220: ...ever the alternator is overhauled new bearings and oil or grease seals are recommended even though the bearings and seals appear to be in good condition A faulty seal can cause an alternator to fail within a very short period of time c Assembly of Alternator 1 Press the ball bearing into the drive end head using a flat block approximately two inch square so that the pressure is exerted on the oute...

Page 221: ...r Figure 11 Figure 12 Prestolite Terminal Assembly Figure 13 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 16 Reissued July 1 1993 1K16 PRESTOLITE FIBER WASHER END HEAD LOCKWASHER RECTIFIER MOUNTING PLATE FLATWASHER INSULATOR TERMINAL STUD NUT AUXILLARY TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL ...

Page 222: ...rence between the brush holder and rotor Check between the field terminal and ground with an ohmmeter The ohmmeter must indicate the amount of rotor resistance listed Refer to Chart 2403 Alternator Specifications Slip Ring End Bearing Assembly Testing Alternator Figure 14 Figure 15 7 Testing Alternator a Wiring connections for bench testing the alternator are shown in Figure 15 Refer to the Chart ...

Page 223: ...elt tension is correct torque alternator pivot bolts 225 255 inch pounds b Deflection Method This method consists of measuring the amount of deflection caused by a predetermined amount of tension 1 Attach hook of a small spring scale to belt at the approximate mid point between rear gear support and alternator 2 Pull on scale until a reading of 14 pounds is obtained 10 pounds for used belts 3 Meas...

Page 224: ... 17 for Terminal identification c The stator core and coil assembly consists of a number of steel stampings riveted together to form the stator core which contains 36 equally spaced vertical slots to accommodate the sta tor coil windings Refer to Figure 18 d The rotor core and coil assembly consists of the rotor shaft two slip rings two rotor halves and the coil assembly The shaft is supported at ...

Page 225: ...tification Figure 17 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 20 Reissued July 1 1993 1K20 BATTERY TERMINAL INSULATOR GROUNDED BRUSH BRUSH HOLDER BRUSH SPRING RECTIFIER INSULATORS ROTOR STATOR RECTIFIER REAR HOUSING REAR BEARING FRONT BEARING FRONT HOUSING GROUND STATER FIELD BATTERY ...

Page 226: ... PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 21 Reissued July 1 1993 1K21 TO DIODES TO DIODES TO DIODES TO DIODES TO DIODES D ELTA CONNECTION POSITIVE OR INSULATED DIODE PLATE BATTERY TERMINAL GROUND TERMINAL NEGATIVE OR GROUND DIODE PLATE GEAR SHAPED HEAT SINKS FOR DIODE COOLING ...

Page 227: ...ips of Alternator Components Figure 20 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 22 Reissued July 1 1993 1K22 DETAIL B DIODES DETAIL A STATOR PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3 P h a s e 1 Phase 3 P h a s e 2 STA GRD BAT FLD A C B DETAIL C ROTOR ...

Page 228: ...um plates to form the plate and diode assemblies The aluminum plates serve as heat sinks to cool the diodes by providing increased surface area to the air flow through vent slots in the rear hous ing to the fan at the front of the alternator One plate and diode assembly is connected to each of the three leads to form the full wave bridge rectifier Diode terminal wires are connected to the bus bars...

Page 229: ...d clean or b Ammeter is defective Replace ammeter 5 Battery Supply Voltage Test If aircraft ammeter shows discharge with engine running perform the following test before checking alternator voltage output The test will verify that battery voltage is being supplied to regulator Alternator cannot provide output unless field voltage is supplied a Disconnect connector at voltage regulator b Connect vo...

Page 230: ...g light e Slowly increase engine speed to 1500 rpm f Voltage reading should increase a minimum of 0 5 volt above previous reading g Turn off landing light and shut down engine h If voltage fails to increase a minimum of 0 5 volt position alternator section of master switch to OFF An under voltage condition exists Proceed as follows to isolate problem 1 Disconnect regulator plug and install a jumpe...

Page 231: ...ION DO NOT use digital ohmmeter for this test it will give false indications 1 Set the ohmmeter selector switch to resistance scale 10 and zero the meter 2 Attach one ohmmeter lead to BAT terminal and the other to the STA terminal A reading of 60 ohms should be obtained Reverse leads An infinite no needle movement should be obtained 3 A reading of 60 ohms or less in both directions indicates a A d...

Page 232: ...ocedures cont Rectifier Ground and Positive Diode Test Figure 21 Stator Ground and Negative Diode Test Figure 22 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 27 Reissued July 1 1993 1L3 ALTERNATOR OHMMETER ALTERNATOR OHMMETER ...

Page 233: ...or Ground Test Refer to Figure 23 1 Set ohmmeter selector switch to resistance scale 1 and zero meter 2 Connect one lead to the FLD terminal and the other lead to the GRD terminal 3 Spin alternator pulley and note ohmmeter reading Meter should read between 4 and 200 ohms and fluctuate while rotor is turning 4 A reading lower than 4 ohms indicates a A grounded positive brush b A grounded field term...

Page 234: ...4 retainer bolts from rectifier assembly 2 retainer bolts from brush assembly and 1 screw from radio suppression capacitor lead Remove stator rectifier assembly and brush assembly from rear housing 6 If replacing the rear shaft bearing support housing on the inner bearing boss and press bearing from housing 7 If the rectifier is to be replaced or if the stator and diodes are to be bench checked se...

Page 235: ... PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 30 Reissued July 1 1993 1L6 RECTIFIER BRUSH ASSEMBLY REAR BEARING STATOR REAR HOUSING STATOR BRUSH SOLDER CONNECTION S UPPRESSION CAPACITOR STATOR SOLDER CONNECTION 3 PLACES RECTIFIER RETAINER BOLT 4 PLACES ...

Page 236: ... rotor Front Housing Disassembly Figure 26 10 Remove front bearing from housing by removing bearing retainer screws The bearing is normally a slip fit If stuck support housing and press bearing from the housing Front Housing Components Figure 27 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 31 Reissued July 1 1993 1L7 ADAPTER 5 16 APEX SOCKET WRENCH 15 16 BOX WRENCH FRONT BEAR...

Page 237: ...e loads on both the stator and rotor assemblies for loose or broken soldered connections and for burned insulation Resolder poor connections Replace parts that show signs of burned insulation CAUTION Do not turn down slip rings beyond a minimum diameter of 1 22 inches If the rings are badly damaged replace the rotor assembly 8 Check the slip rings brush contacts for nicks and surface roughness Nic...

Page 238: ...fer to Figure 28 cont Rotor Continuity Test Figure 24 28 d Rotor Ground Test Refer to Figure 29 Rotor Ground Test Figure 29 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 33 Reissued July 1 1993 1L9 OHMMETER ROTOR ROTOR OHMMETER ...

Page 239: ...place the rotor if repairs cannot be made e Stator Continuity Test Refer to Figure 30 1 Using a 100 watt soldering iron disconnect the three stator wires from diode assembly and remove stator from rear housing 2 Set the ohmmeter selector switch on resistance scale 1 and zero the meter 3 Connect ohmmeter leads alternately between all three sets of leads Meter readings should be equal between any pa...

Page 240: ...nnecting one ohmmeter lead to GRD post terminal on rectifier and connect other lead to each stator lead connection of rectifier momentarily Reverse ohmmeter leads and check in opposite direction Meter must shown continuity in one direction and infinity no needle movement in other direction 3 Test the positive diodes by connecting one ohmmeter lead to the BAT terminal on rectifier and other lead to...

Page 241: ...stall radio suppressor capacitor in rear of housing and install retainer screw 7 Install springs and brushes into brush holder Install short length of 040 wire through brush holder to retain brushes in place Wire should be long enough to extend through hole in housing for removal after housings are assembled 8 Install two retainer screws in brush assembly and housing Hold down on brush assembly wh...

Page 242: ...en BAT and GRD retainer nuts then 4 rectifier retainer bolts 13 Install the 3 stator winding leads to rectifier posts and solder with 100 watt iron to prevent overheating of connection and resin core solder Solder stator terminal lead to diode assembly PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 37 Reissued July 1 1993 1L13 ROTOR SPACER 2 PLACES FRONT BEARING BEARING RETAINE...

Page 243: ...15 Spin pulley to ensure that alternator is free of binding or noise 16 Pull retainer wire from brush assembly and seal hole in housing with EP 711 sealant or equivalent Available from Coast Pro Seal Compton California or equivalent Rear Housing Bearing and Brush Assembly Installation Figure 34 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 38 Reissued July 1 1993 1L14 REAR BEA...

Page 244: ...using Components Figure 35 Housings Assembly Figure 36 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 30 00 Page 24 39 Reissued July 1 1993 1L15 BATTERY TERMINAL INSULATOR RECTIFIER INSULATORS REAR HOUSING RECTIFIER STATOR SCRIBE LINE THRU BOLT 4 PLACES BRUSH ASSEMBLY RETAINER WIRE ...

Page 245: ...that may accumulate due to the charging process of the battery The drain is capped off from the bottom of the fuselage and should be opened occasionally to drain any accumulation of liquid or during cleaning of the box The battery should be checked for fluid level but must not be filled above the baffle plates A hydrometer check should be performed to determine the percent of charge in the battery...

Page 246: ... position in battery battery box b Connect battery cables c Install and safety wire wing nuts securing battery box cover d Install floor panel and external access panel 4 Testing Battery Specific gravity values for checking battery charge using a hydrometer are listed in Chart 5 If the alternator output is known to be correct battery capability can be more accurately determined with a load type te...

Page 247: ...hydrogen gasses from being circulated throughout the building e It is recommended a wet cloth be placed over the vent caps within the manifold to prevent splashing of electrolyte NOTE Maintenance personnel should refer to latest version of applicable battery manufacturer s service manual for any limi tations or special charging procedures f If a constant current recommended charge is available the...

Page 248: ...ate voltmeter with at least a 20 volt scale 1 Connect positive voltmeter lead to red wire at the regulator harness connector or terminal block 2 Connect negative voltmeter lead to the regulator housing NOTE Do not connect voltmeter across battery because regulator is designed to compensate for resistance contained within wiring harness 3 With the alternator turning at sufficient rpm to produce a h...

Page 249: ...meter with a scale of at least 20 volts b A suitable power supply with an output of at least 20 volts or sufficient batteries with a voltage divider to regulate voltage 2 Connect test equipment as follows a Connect B to Bat of the overvoltage control Be sure connection is secure and made to a clean bright surface b Connect B to frame of the overvoltage control Be sure connection is secure and made...

Page 250: ...charging current falls below 20 amps NOTE For all normal operations using the PEP jumper cables the master switch should be OFF It is possible to use the aircraft battery in parallel by turning the master switch ON This will give longer cranking capabilities but will not increase the amperage Care should be exercised because if aircraft battery has been depleted the external power supply can be re...

Page 251: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 40 00 Page 24 46 Reissued July 1 1993 1L22 ...

Page 252: ... XX 12 10 3 5 Whelen WRML 12 10 3 5 Whelen White Strobe 10 3 8 X X Position Lights 7 5 4 X Landing Lights 10 8 0 X Instrument Light s 5 Max Red Flood 5 1 0 Panel 5 2 4 X Reading Light Dome 5 0 6 X Fuel Pump Pulsating Carb 10 5 X Engine Gauges 5 Approx 1 0 X Elec Turn Bank 5 0 5 X Pitot Heat 15 13 2 X Cigar Lighter 8 0 X Master Solenoid 0 8 X Starter Solenoid 15 10 0 Avionics See Mfg s Installation...

Page 253: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24 50 00 Page 24 48 Reissued July 1 1993 1L24 ...

Page 254: ...II HP MAINTENANCE MANUAL PA 32R 301 SARATOGA SP PA 32R 301 SARATOGA II HP PA 32R 301T SARATOGA SP Card 2 of 4 THIS HANDBOOK INCLUDES THE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION REQUIRED TO BE AVAILABLE BY FAR PART 23 Courtesy of Bomar Flying Service www bomar biz ...

Page 255: ...craft Corporation All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of the Piper Aircraft Corporation except for the inclusion of brief quotations in a review ...

Page 256: ... OF CONTENTS EFFECTIVITY CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY INTRODUCTION 2A3 System Chapter Index Guide 2A3 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Introduction Contents Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 2A3 ...

Page 257: ...0 1C7 Time Limits 20 1C8 Scheduled Maintenance 50 1D2 Unscheduled Maintenance Checks 6 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 00 1D8 General 7 LIFTING AND SHORING 10 1D23 Jacking 8 LEVELING AND WEIGHING 10 1E3 Weighing and Balancing 20 1E4 Leveling 9 TOWING AND TAXIING 10 1E7 Towing 20 1E8 Taxiing 10 PARKING AND MOORING 10 1E11 Parking 20 1E12 Mooring 11 REQUIRED PLACARDS 20 1E15 Exterior Placards and Markings 30 1...

Page 258: ...OWER 00 1K1 General 30 1K3 DC Generation 40 1L19 External Power 50 1L21 Electrical Load Distribution 25 EQUIPMENT FURNISHINGS 10 2A15 Flight Compartment 27 FLIGHT CONTROLS 00 2A23 General 10 2B7 Aileron and Tab 20 2B18 Rudder and Tab 30 2C5 Elevator and Tab 50 2C21 Flaps 28 FUEL 00 2D14 General 10 2D20 Storage 20 2E10 Distribution 40 2E14 Indicating 29 HYDRAULIC POWER 00 2E21 General 10 2F19 Main ...

Page 259: ...ear and Doors 30 3C16 Extension and Retraction 40 3C22 Wheels and Brakes 60 3D18 Position and Warning 33 LIGHTS 00 3E2 General Compartment 10 3E6 Flight Compartment 40 3E8 Exterior 34 NAVIGATION AND PITOT STATIC 00 3E14 General 10 3E18 Flight Instrtuments Pitot Static 20 3E22 Attitude Direction 40 3F2 Independent Position Determining 35 OXYGEN 00 3F10 General 10 3F12 Crew Passenger 37 VACUUM 00 3G...

Page 260: ... 55 STABILIZERS 10 3I6 Horizontal Stabilizers 30 3I12 Vertical Stabilizer 40 3I14 Rudder 56 WINDOWS 10 3I18 Flight Compartment 20 3I20 Cabin 57 WINGS 00 3J2 General 20 3J4 Auxiliary Structure 40 3J6 Attach Fittings 50 3J12 Flight Surfaces 61 PROPELLERS 10 3J20 Propeller Assembly 20 3K6 Controlling 70 STANDARD PRACTICES ENGINE 00 3K12 General 71 POWER PLANT 00 3K16 General 10 3L6 Cowling PIPER AIRC...

Page 261: ...ing 77 ENGINE INDICATING 00 4C13 General 10 4C13 Power 20 4C16 Temperature 78 EXHAUST 00 4C23 General 79 OIL 20 4D7 Distribution 30 4D7 Indicating 80 STARTING 00 4D11 General 10 4D15 Cranking 81 TURBINES 20 4E1 Turbo Supercharger 91 CHARTS WIRING DIAGRAMS 00 4E16 General 10 4F19 Electrical Schematics 95 SPECIAL PURPOSE EQUIPMENT 00 4J8 Special Purpose Equipment END PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T M...

Page 262: ...GRIDS 2A9 THROUGH 2A12 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Introduction Page 6 Reissued July 1 1993 2A9 ...

Page 263: ...CHAPTER 25 EQUIPMENT FURNISHINGS 2A13 ...

Page 264: ...RID NO EFFECTIVITY 25 10 00 FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 2A15 July 1 1993 25 10 00 Pilot Seat Lock and Release Rigging 2A15 July 1 1993 25 00 00 Shoulder Harness Inertia Reel Adjustment 2A16 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 25 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 2A14 ...

Page 265: ...Tighten screws on clamps to secure push pull cable in this position Stop should be lubricated and free to swivel without excessive play 5 With stop assembly in an engaged position push on seat back to check engagement Rotate the seat back release handle and check for disengagement of seat back Seat Back Lock Figure 1 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 25 00 00 Page 25 1 Reissued Jul...

Page 266: ...l shaft end 5 Aligning slot in shaft with spring tang wind spring 6 turns 1 2 turn and snap plastic cover into holes in reel end shaft 6 Release harness and allowing it to wind up extend the harness a few times to check reel for smooth operation 7 With reel fully wound hold with inertia mechanism end up and pry off plastic cap over mechanism and set reel aside 8 Install nut in plastic cap so that ...

Page 267: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 25 00 00 Page 25 3 Reissued July 1 1993 2A17 ...

Page 268: ...GRIDS 2A18 THROUGH 2A19 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 25 00 00 Page 25 4 Revised 2A18 ...

Page 269: ...CHAPTER 27 FLIGHT CONTROLS 2A20 ...

Page 270: ...00 Troubleshooting Rudder Control System 2B18 July 1 1993 27 20 00 Rudder Control Cables Removal 2B19 July 1 1993 27 20 00 Rudder Control Cables Installation 2B19 July 1 1993 27 20 00 Rigging and Adjustment of Rudder Controls 2B21 July 1 1993 27 20 00 Rudder Trim Control 2B23 July 1 1993 27 20 00 To Remove Rudder Trim Control 2B23 July 1 1993 27 20 00 To Install Rudder Trim Control 2B23 July 1 199...

Page 271: ...50 00 Removal of Manually Operated Wing 27 50 00 Flap Controls 2C2 1July 1 1993 27 50 00 Installation of Manually Operated Wing 27 50 00 Flap Controls 2C23 July 1 1993 27 50 00 Manually Operated Wing Flaps Rigging and Adjustment 2C24 July 1 1993 27 50 00 Electrically Operated Wing Flaps 2D2 July 1 1993 27 50 00 Removal of Electrically Operated Wing Flaps Controls 2D2 July 1 1993 27 50 00 Installat...

Page 272: ...ractices and Procedures The following tips may be helpful in the removal installation and rigging of individual control system assemblies a Turnbuckles must be assembled and adjusted in a manner that each terminal end is screwed into the barrel an approximately equal distance During adjustment the terminals must not be turned in a manner which would put a permanent twist in the cable b After adjus...

Page 273: ...2R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 00 00 Page 27 2 Reissued July 1 1993 2A24 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 TEMPERATURE DEGREES FAHRENHEIT 10 8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 SUBTRACT ADD RIGGING LOAD CORRECTION POUNDS Damage Here Wrong Damage Here Improper Tool Resulting in locked ball Only Correct Method A special wrench may be required with a long throat ...

Page 274: ...ove cable from aircraft to the extent necessary to expose that particular section Examine cables for broken wires by passing a cloth along length of cable This will clean the cable for a visual inspection and detect broken wires if the cloth snags on cable When snags are found closely examine cable to determine full extent of damage The absence of snags is not positive evidence that broken wires d...

Page 275: ...e and non flexible cables when individual wires in each strand appear to blend together outer wires worn 40 50 percent as depicted in figure 3 Cable Wear Patterns Figure 3 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 00 00 Page 27 4 Reissued July 1 1993 2B2 INDIVIDUAL OUTER WIRES WORN MORE TH AN 50 INDIVIDUAL OUTER WIRES WORN MORE THAN 40 50 NOTE BLENDING OF WORN AREAS INDIVIDUAL OUTER WIR...

Page 276: ...face Internal Cable Wear Figure 4 d Corrosion Carefully examine any cable for corrosion that has a broken wire in a section not in contact with wear producing airframe components such as pulleys fairleads etc It may be necessary to remove and bend the cable to properly inspect it for internal strand corrosion as this condition is usually not evident on the outer surface of the cable Replace cable ...

Page 277: ...y for distortion and or broken strands at the terminal Assure that all bearings and swivel fittings bolted or pinned pivot freely to prevent binding and subsequent failure Check turnbuckles for proper thread exposure and broken or missing safety wires clips 6 Pulleys Inspect pulleys for roughness sharp edges and presence of foreign material embedded in the grooves Examine pulley bearings to assure...

Page 278: ...tterns cont Pulley Wear Patterns Figure 5 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 00 00 Page 27 7 Reissued July 1 1993 2B5 EXCESSIVE CABLE WEAR PULLEY MISALIGNMENT PULLEY TO LARGE FOR CABLE CABLE MISALIGNMENT FROZEN BEARING NORMAL CONDITION ...

Page 279: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 00 00 Page 27 8 Reissued July 1 1993 2B6 ...

Page 280: ...too high Adjust cable tension Control column horizontal Adjust chain tension chain improperly adjusted Pulleys binding or rubbing Replace binding pulleys and or provide clearance between pulleys and brackets Cables not in place on Install cables correctly pulleys Check cable guards Bent aileron and or hinge Repair or replace aileron and or hinge Cables crossed or routed Check routing of control in...

Page 281: ...ntrol chains from control cables where chains and cables join by removing cotter pins nuts bolts and bushings e If control wheel assemblies have not been previously disconnected from tee bar assembly separate control wheel tubes at the flexible joints by removing nuts washers and bolts f Remove tunnel plate just aft of the tee bar by laying back enough tunnel carpet to remove plate attachment scre...

Page 282: ...RIGHT CONTROL WHEEL SPROCKET 2 FLEXIBLE JOINT 3 BOLT ASSY 4 CONTROL WHEEL TUBE 5 L R CONTROLWHEELS 6 TURNBUCKLE 7 TEE BAR ASSY 8 O RING 9 CONTROL WHEEL WASHER 10 CONTROL WHEEL PLATE 11 CONTROL WHEEL WASHER 12 STOP SPACER 13 LEFT CONTROL WHEEL SPROCKET 14 LEFT ROLLER CHAIN 15 AFT IDLER SPROCKET 16 RIGHT ROLLER CHAIN 17 PIN 18 FORWARD IDLER SPROCKET 19 BOLT BUSHING NUT COTTER PIN 20 STABILATOR PULLY...

Page 283: ...hat when the ailerons are neutral the control wheels will be neutral and the chain turnbuckle centered Also the aileron bellcranks should contact their stops before the control wheel hits its stop Maintain 0 030 to 0 040 inch clearance between sprocket pin and adjustable stop bolts on models having adjustable tee bar stops i Set stabilator cable tension with the turnbuckle in the aft section of th...

Page 284: ... Refer to Figure 8 1 To remove any of the control cables in the fuselage or either wing a Remove center seats and seat belt attachments b Remove screws securing floor panel located directly aft of the main spar Lift panel and remove from airplane c Remove tunnel plate just aft of the tee bar by laying back enough tunnel carpet to remove plate attachment screws d Remove forward heat duct from side ...

Page 285: ... Secure the chains in some manner to prevent them from unwrapping from around the sprockets j Draw the cable back through the floor tunnel Aileron Controls Figure 8 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 10 00 Page 27 14 Reissued July 1 1993 2B12 7 25 26 27 18 28 24 5 11 19 28 17 16 10 12 6 10 13 14 15 2 2 1 3 3 23 21 22 9 4 8 20 1 CONTROL CHAIN TURNBUCKLE 2 CONTROL WHEEL SPROCKET 3 ...

Page 286: ...loor tunnel b Connect cable to the end of control chain and secure using bushing bolt nut and cotter pin c Place cable around pulley located in the tunnel below the fuel selector d Position cables and install cable pulleys that attach to lower section of tee bar assembly Secure with bolt washer and nut e Place the cable around pulley located in floor opening just aft of main spar f If primary cont...

Page 287: ...uts washers and bolts 5 Disconnect aileron control rod at aft or forward end as desired by removing the cotter pin nut washer and bolt 6 Remove nut pivot bolt and washers that secure bellcrank The nut is visible from underside of wing 7 Remove bellcrank from within wing G Aileron Bellcrank Assembly Installation Refer to Figure 8 1 Ensure that bellcrank pivot bushing is lubricated Install pivot bus...

Page 288: ...etween bellcrank arm and rib It may be necessary to loosen a primary control cable or balance cable c Neutral position of bellcrank is position at which forward and aft cable connection holes are an equal distance from adjacent outboard wing rib Aileron Rigging Figure 9 c With each bellcrank set at neutral the ailerons may be checked and adjusted for neutral as follows 1 Ensure that bellcrank rigg...

Page 289: ...dler cross over sprockets at control tee bar to allow chain to fit snug around control wheel sprockets and over idler sprockets c Ensure both bellcranks are at neutral position d Adjust turnbuckles of primary and balance cables located in access opening just aft of main spar to proper tension Maintain neutral center position of control wheels To obtain neutral position of both control wheels it ma...

Page 290: ...re contacting the control wheel stops Maintain 0 030 to 0 040 clearance between sprocket pin and adjustable stop bolts on models having adjustable tee bar stops f Check complete system for operation and safety for turnbuckles bolts etc install all pulley guard pins g Install access plates and panels NOTE When an out of trim condition persists despite all the rigging corrections that can be made th...

Page 291: ...ovement properly Rudder pedal torque tube Lubricate torque tube bearing in need of lubrication bearings Cable tension too high Adjust cable tension Pulleys binding or rubbing Replace binding pulleys and or provide clearance between pulleys and brackets Cables not in place on Install cables correctly Check pulleys cable guards Cables crossed or routed Check routing of control incorrectly cables Rud...

Page 292: ... plate just aft of tee bar by removing enough carpet from tunnel to allow plate attachment screws and plate to be removed k Remove forward head duct from one side of the floor tunnel from which control cable is to be removed l Move cable guard pin located under pulley cluster and below fuel selector by removing cotter pin from exposed end and sliding it to the left or right as required m Disconnec...

Page 293: ... ASSY 2 BOLT WASHER NUT COTTER PIN 3 BOLT BUSHING WASHER NUT 4 CABLE GUARD PIN 5 PULLEY CLUSTER 6 RUB BLOCLS 7 BOLT BUSHING WASHER NUT 8 PULLEY CLUSTER 9 CABLE GUARD PIN 10 CABLE GUARD PLATE 11 BOLT BUSHING WASHER NUT 12 PULLEY CLUSTER 13 RIGHT FORWARD CABLE 14 LEFT FORWARD CABLE 15 LEFT TURNBUCKLE 16 RIGHT TURNBUCKLE 17 RIGHT AFT CABLE 18 LEFT AFT CABLE 19 BOLT BUSHING WASHER NUT 20 RUDDER HORN 2...

Page 294: ... install aft rudder control cable a Position control cable s Refer to Figure 12 b Connect cable s at turnbuckle s in aft section of fuselage c Connect cable to rudder horn with clevis bolt bushing washer and nut d Set cable tension and check rigging adjustment per Rigging and Adjustment of Rudder Controls e Install tail cone and secure with screws f Install the access panel to the aft section of t...

Page 295: ...Rudder Travel Adjustments Figure 13 Figure 14 Rudder Rigging Clamping Rudder Pedals Figure 15 Figure 16 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 20 00 Page 27 24 Reissued July 1 1993 2B22 TOOL REFER TO CHAPTER 95 RUDDE R TRAVE L 28 1 RIGHT LEFT CABL E TE NSIO N 65 LBS 5 LBS RUDDE R ST OP ...

Page 296: ...ment screws b Place trim knob on assembly and rotate to extreme left counterclockwise trim position c Disconnect housing lug from arm on rudder pedal torque tube by removing cotter pin nut washer and bolt d Remove threaded bushing from aft end of mounting channel by removing cotter pin and cle vis pin e Remove mounting channel may by removing channel attachment screws inside of channel 1 Middle an...

Page 297: ...nstall fuel selector panel cover and cover attachment screws g Install rudder trim knob h Ensure that neutral indicator aligns with neutral position on cover placard Rudder Trim Control Figure 17 3 Rigging and Adjustment of Rudder Trim Controls No adjustments are necessary other than those required during installation of assembly in the air plane Refer to Installation of Rudder Trim Controls parag...

Page 298: ... Pull the lower end of the tee bar aft Rudder and Steering Pedal Assembly Figure 18 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 20 00 Page 27 27 Reissued July 1 1993 2C1 5 6 12 2 9 27 1 25 2 2 0 3 19 2 6 10 14 1 7 16 2 3 24 2 2 21 35 19 15 17 16 32 1 7 16 31 18 18 15 11 13 28 14 13 10 1 0 7 8 29 27 4 6 9 8 7 13 1 1 15 2 8 10 1 4 18 18 3 3 16 1 7 34 12 13 1 1 15 30 30 12 30 30 12 1 L OUTER...

Page 299: ...d Steering Pedal Assembly Refer to Figure 18 a Assemble torque tube assembly as shown in Figure 18 Do not install the two bolts through the center of the tube assembly at this time b Place upper support blocks on the ends of the torque tube assembly Note that a washer is required on each end of tube c Position support blocks on their mounting brackets at each side of fuselage and secure with bolts...

Page 300: ...der Controls n Set stabilator cable tension Check rigging and adjustment per Rigging and Adjustment of Stabilator Controls Section 27 30 00 o Check aileron cable tension p Check safety of bolt and turnbuckles q Install floor tunnel plate and secure with screws Fasten tunnel carpet in place r Install fuel selector lever on selector torque tube Secure with clevis pin and safety with cotter pin s Ins...

Page 301: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 20 00 Page 27 30 Reissued July 1 1993 2C4 ...

Page 302: ...tor System not lubricated Lubricate system control movement properly Cable tension too high Adjust cable tension Binding control column Adjust and lubricate Resistance to stabilator Pulleys binding or rubbing Replace binding pulleys and control movement cont or provide clearance between pulleys and brackets Cables not in place on Install cables correctly pulleys Cables crossed or routed Check rout...

Page 303: ...rim control wheel moves System not lubricated Lubricate system with excessive resistance properly Cable tension too high Adjust cable tension Pulleys binding or rubbing Replace binding pulleys Provide clearance between pulleys and brackets Cables not in place on Install cables properly pulleys Trim tab hinge binding Lubricate hinge If necessary replace Cables crossed or routed Check routing of con...

Page 304: ... selector torque tube by removing attachment pin located at bottom of lever j Remove tunnel plate just aft of tee bar by removing enough carpet from tunnel to allow plate attachment screws and plate to be removed k To remove right upper stabilator control cable 1 Remove cotter pin cable guards at pulley located in forward area of the tunnel 2 Disconnect cables from lower end of tee bar by removing...

Page 305: ...located in aft area of floor opening g Install cable guard under pulley cluster located in aft area of aft floor tunnel Secure with screws h Set cable tension Check rigging and adjustment per Rigging and Adjustment of Stabilator Controls PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 30 00 Page 27 34 Reissued July 1 1993 2C8 7 8 18 8 7 17 19 4 5 16 3 6 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 5 9 14 2 1 0 1 CONTRO...

Page 306: ... adjustment per Rigging and Adjustment of Stabilator Controls f Install access panels to aft section of the fuselage D Stabilator Controls Rigging and Adjustment 1 To check and set the correct degree of stabilator travel a Level airplane Refer to Leveling Chapter 8 b Place stabilator in neutral position Neutral position is obtained when a level placed on stabilator rigging tool Figure 20 indicates...

Page 307: ...ilator Trim Tab A STA BILATOR TRAILIN G EDGE U P TRAVEL FROM NEUTRAL 14 5 0 5 B STABILATOR TRAILING EDGE DOWN TRAVEL FROM NEUTRAL 5 5 0 5 C CABLE TENSION 40 LBS 5 LBS A STA BILATOR TAB TRAILING EDGE UP TRAVEL FROM NEUTR AL 5 1 B STAB ILATOR TA B TRA ILIN G EDGE D OW N TRAVEL FROM NEUTR AL 8 1 C CABLE TENSION 14 LBS 1 LB STAB ILATOR CH OR D LINE NEUTRAL POSITION 1 Neutral position ofstabilator is w...

Page 308: ...uckle of lower cable in aft section of fuselage and adjust turnbuckle of upper cable to obtain correct tension Cable tension should be obtained with control wheel one quarter inch dimension from stop and stabilator contacting its stop f With the tension of upper cable correct and control wheel still forward adjust the turnbuckle of lower cable to obtain correct tension g Check safety of all turnbu...

Page 309: ... Remove control wheel cover by removing cover attaching screws 2 Remove wheel assembly from its mounting brackets by removing nut washer and bolt that secures wheel between the brackets Draw wheel from brackets Use caution not to damage trim indicator wire 3 Unwrap left cable from drum 4 Wheel and drum are joined by a push fit Separate these two items with their center bushing Unwrap right cable 5...

Page 310: ... PLATE ASSEMBLY 6 TRIM TAB PULLEY 7 CABLE GUARD 8 STABILATOR TRIM PLATE 9 STABILATOR TRIM LINK 10 SNAP RING 11 STABILATOR TRIM ARM ASSEMBLY 12 CABLE GUARD 13 THRUST BEARING 14 BEARING 15 STABILATOR TRIM RIB 16 STABILATOR TRIM SHIM 17 STABILATOR TRIM INDICATOR 18 STABILATOR TRIM BARREL 19 STABILATOR TRIM RIB 20 PULLEY BUSHING 32 21 INNER BUSHING 22 OUTER BUSHING 23 BUSHING 24 PULLEY 25 PULLEY 26 NU...

Page 311: ...rd 13 Remove cable guard plate from underside of pulley cluster located in aft area of floor tunnel by removing plate attachment screws 14 Remove cable guard from cable pulleys in aft lower section of fuselage forward of cable turnbuckles 15 With cables disconnected from trim control wheel draw cable s through floor tunnel 2 To Install Forward Stabilator Trim Assembly Refer to Figure 23 a Install ...

Page 312: ...over trim control wheel and secure with screws and special washers 15 Install fuel selector knobs and secure with set screws 16 Install seat belts removed from top of floor tunnel Secure with bolt washer and nut 17 Install floor panel and seat belt attachments aft of main spar Secure panel with screws 18 Install aft floor tunnel and secure with screws 19 Install carpet over aft floor tunnel 20 Ins...

Page 313: ... Fabricate block with a notch so hardware can be installed After installation of hardware safety wire the bolts c Ensure barrel bushings are installed in rib plate and clip d Lubricate bushings and install trim barrel in bushings between the two support ribs e Attach bottom diagonal rib to horizontal rib Secure with bolt washer and nut f Install thrust washer washer and snap ring on lower end of b...

Page 314: ...ving nut washers and bolt b With turnbuckle still two inches from pulley turn screw down until pin contacts plate 6 Check rod end on tab actuating arm for approximately six threads forward of jam nut 7 Connect links to trim screw and secure with bolt washers and nut 8 Turn the trim wheel until trim tab streamlines with neutral stabilator 9 Check bubble of protractor over neutral tab then check tab...

Page 315: ...d not activate the stall warning horn A deicer system incorporates a pneumatic deice system and heated lift detectors on PA 32R 301T only s n s 32R 8129012 and up Although the airplane is not approved for operations in icing conditions the heat provided to the lift detector sensors and case plates minimizes the possibility of the stall warning system becoming inoperative due to icing 2 Removal of ...

Page 316: ...the vane If the stall warning comes on too late move switch up If the stall warning comes on to early move switch down Retighten the screws after making any adjustments The only way to test the accuracy of the setting is to fly the airplane into a stall condition and NOTE the speed at which the stall warning comes on The stall should be made with the flaps and landing gear up and power off It may ...

Page 317: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 30 00 Page 27 46 Reissued July 1 1993 2C20 ...

Page 318: ...lane serial numbers 32R 8613001 through 32R 8613005 and 3213001 and up PA 32R 301 and 32R 8629001 through 32R 8629005 and 3229001 and up PA 32R 301T have four stops 0 10 25 and 40 B Manually Operated Flaps 1 Removal of Manually Operated Wing Flap Controls Refer to Figure 26 a To remove flap torque tube assembly 1 Extend flaps to 40 position 2 Remove floor panel located aft of main spar by removing...

Page 319: ...t clevis pin and bushing 5 Remove flap handle bracket and trim control wheel cover PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 50 00 Page 27 48 Reissued July 1 1993 2C22 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 2 9 1 3 6 1 0 8 7 5 1 4 1 6 6 2 1 5 17 18 30 31 32 33 20 2 1 22 23 1 9 36 37 34 6 1 0 6 4 8 5 1 1 9 1 3 24 25 27 28 26 29 35 14 3 1 ROD ATTACHMENT BRACKET 2 BOLT WASHER NUT 3 JAM NUT 4 FLAP CONTROL ROD 5 BEA...

Page 320: ...ley located just ahead of spar housing in forward floor tunnel 5 Attach cable end to tension chain and secure with bushing clevis bolt nut and cotter pin If chain is not installed because of torque tube assembly being removed install torque tube assembly per paragraph c before performing step 6 6 Pull the flap handle full back and connect the tension spring to the cable end c To install flap flap ...

Page 321: ...tension chain Secure with bushing clevis bolt nut and cotter pin 11 Pull flap handle full back extend and connect tension spring Release flap handle to the forward retract position 12 Connect flap control tube to flap and or torque tube crank and secure The bolt and bushing that connects control tube to crank is installed through a hole in the side of fuse lage located over torque tube d Install t...

Page 322: ...tool even with trailing edge of flap g With flap control rods connected between torque tube crank arm and flaps check that 1 Surface of wing contacts tool at its forward surface and at spacer 2 Aft end of flap contacts aft end of tool Maintain a light pressure on underside of flap to remove slack in the linkage while making this check h Adjust each flap push rod so that chord line of flap forms a ...

Page 323: ...At the flaps by removing nuts washers and bolts at the torque tube cranks arms or by b Removing bolts and washers from inner side of each crank Remove bolt through a hole in the fuselage side skin located over torque tube 5 Disconnect electrical connections from limit switches mounted to torque tube switch plate 6 Disconnect cable ends from torque tube pulley assembly by removing the cotter pins 7...

Page 324: ...ap control cable 1 Remove center seats Remove center floor panel by removing screws securing panel 2 Remove aft heat deflectors on each forward floor tunnel by sliding them far enough to release spring fasteners PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 50 00 Page 27 53 Reissued July 1 1993 2D3 1 4 5 2 3 6 8 9 10 11 15 16 14 1 3 12 7 20 19 18 17 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 2 PULLLEYS 3 FLAP SELECT...

Page 325: ...or jack screw to its mounting bracket 3 Install nut washers and bolt securing flap actuator jack screw to torque tube bellcrank 4 Connect electrical leads to flap actuator motor b To install flap control cable 1 Position cable assembly in tunnel 2 Connect cable to flap selector lever and flap selector lever support bracket mounted on aft side of instrument panel 3 Attach cable ends to pulley assem...

Page 326: ...r seats and seat belt attachments 14 Retract flaps 3 Rigging and Ajustment of Electrically Operated Wing Flaps a To Rig Control Cable 1 Loosen lever cable clamp nut so that cable can move freely through cable clamp Secure lever in the full down position Refer to Figure 30 2 Position the swash plate assembly on torque tube and secure inplace Refer to Figure 30 3 Loosen cable housing clamps at pulle...

Page 327: ...g Flaps cont Electricaly Operated Flap Torque Tube Assembly Figure 31 b To Adjust Cam Electricaly Operated Flap Cam Adjustment Figure 32 CABLE H OUSING CLAMP TYP MEASURE CABLE DEFLECTION FROM STATIC BETWEEN THESE POINTS SWASH PLATE ASSEMBLY PULLEY SUPPORT CHANNEL CAM TORQUE TUBE TORQUE TUBE ACTUATOR PUSH ROD 0 07 INCH MINIMUM 0 19 INCH MAXIMUM NULL POINT CAM ...

Page 328: ...in cam and rotate until flap in transit light is out Refer to Figure 31 Tighten the cam set screws 7 Push in electric flap circuit breaker and verify that flap motor does not run 8 Move selector lever to full DOWN position Verify that actuator retracts and stops about 0 4 inch short of bottoming out 9 Move flap selector lever to the full UP position Verify that clearance between actuator push rod ...

Page 329: ...t maintain a slight up pressure on underside of flap sufficient to take slack out of linkage d Flap Travel Check 1 While checking flap travel maintaining a light up pressure on underside of flap Travel shall be a In the full UP position 0 1 b At FIRST stop 10 2 c At the SECOND stop 25 2 d At full DOWN position 40 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 50 00 Page 27 58 Reissued July...

Page 330: ...PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 50 00 Page 27 59 Reissued July 1 1993 2D9 ...

Page 331: ...PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 27 50 00 Page 27 60 Reissued July 1 1993 2D10 ...

Page 332: ...CHAPTER 28 FUEL 2D11 ...

Page 333: ... July 1 1993 28 10 00 Fuel Cells Repair Limitations 2E1 July 1 1993 28 10 00 Heat Cure Repair Patch Method 2E2 July 1 1993 28 10 00 Air Cure Repair Patch Method 2E3 July 1 1993 28 10 00 Accessory Replacement 2E3 July 1 1993 28 10 00 Fuel Cell Defect Repairs 2E4 July 1 1993 28 10 00 Testing Fuel Cells 2E4 July 1 1993 28 10 00 Outboard Fuel Cell Installation 2E5 8 80 28 10 00 Fuel System Inspection ...

Page 334: ... Sender Unit 2E14 July 1 1993 28 40 00 General 2E14 July 1 1993 28 40 00 Fuel Quantity Sender and Gauge Check 2E14 July 1 1993 28 40 00 PA 32R 301 SP and PA 32R 301T 28 40 00 Airplanes 2E14 July 1 1993 28 40 00 PA 32R 301 II HP Airplanes 2E15 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 28 Cont Effec Page 2 Reissued July 1 1993 2D13 ...

Page 335: ...al selection to the OFF position From the selector valve the fuel goes to the electric fuel pump which is also mounted aft of the main spar and then goes forward to the engine driven fuel pump which forces the fuel through the injector unit into the engine Refer to Figures 1 2 or 3 for layout and relationship of the fuel system and components 2 Troubleshooting Fuel System Electrical and mechanical...

Page 336: ...ce sender completely filled with fuel Circuit breaker open Check and reset Float and arm assembly of fuel Check sender sticking Bad ground Check for good contact at ground lip or rear of gauge No fuel pressure indication Fuel selector valve stuck Check fuel selector valve Fuel tanks empty Check fuel tanks and fill Defective gauge Replace gauge Fuel selector valve in improper Reposition fuel select...

Page 337: ...41 Figure 1 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 28 00 00 Page 28 3 Reissued July 1 1993 2D16 FUEL CELL FUEL CELL FUEL CELL FUEL CELL VENT VENT FUEL QUANTITY GAUGES FUEL SELECTOR VALVE FUEL FLOW PRESSURE GAUGE ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP FUEL INJECTOR VENT LINE FLOW DIVIDER FUEL NOZZELS ...

Page 338: ...AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 28 00 00 Page 28 4 Reissued July 1 1993 2D17 FUEL CELL FUEL CELL FUEL CELL FUEL CELL VENT VENT FUEL QUANTITY GAUGES FUEL SELECTOR VALVE FUEL FLOW PRESSURE GAUGE ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP FUEL INJECTOR VENT LINE FLOW DIVIDER FUEL NOZZELS ...

Page 339: ...00 00 Page 28 5 Reissued July 1 1993 2D18 FUEL CELL FUEL CELL FUEL CELL FUEL CELL VENT VENT FUEL QUANTITY GAUGE FUEL SELECTOR VALVE ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP MANIFOLD PRESSURE AND FUEL FLOW GAUGE ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP DECK PRESSURE LINE TURBOCHARGER COMPRESSOR FLOW DIVIDERS 2 FUEL INJECTOR FUEL NOZZLES 6 TO MANIFOLD ...

Page 340: ...PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 28 00 00 Page 28 6 Reissued July 1 1993 2D19 ...

Page 341: ...k replaced 2 Seal leaks with Products Research Corporation PR 1422A series or PR1433G series sealant For example PR1422A1 B Inboard Fuel Tank Removal 1 Completely drain fuel from tank 2 Remove cover from access hole located on underside of wing between wing stations 88 75 and 115 95 3 Loosen clamps at hose connections on fuel line and fuel vent line Slide hose connections away from fuel tank 4 Dis...

Page 342: ...hrough access opening at wing station 129 3 lower wing surface disconnect electrical wire from fuel sender unit terminal Remove the five bolts securing fuel sender unit and remove sender unit from fuel cell 10 Inserting arm between fuel cell and top of wing separate velcro strips which hold fuel cell in place 11 Fold fuel cell into a manageable form and withdraw it through the access opening at to...

Page 343: ...16 20 C 1 FUEL CELL 11 SPAR 21 FUEL VENT INTERCONNECT 2 FUEL SENDER UNIT 12 FUEL VENT VALVE ASSEMBLY LINE 3 AN3 6A BOLT TORQUE 13 10HL CLAMP TORQUE 22 FUEL TANK INTERCONNECT TO 25 IN LBS 12 16 IN LBS LINE 4 AN935 10 LOCKWASHER 14 NIPPLE 23 32HL CLAMP TORQUE 5 INSULATING WASHER 15 FUEL VENT LINE 30 35 IN LBS 6 AN960 10 7 WASHER 16 NUT RING 24 12HL CLAMP TORQUE 7 NEOPRENE GASKET 17 FUEL CELL 15 20 I...

Page 344: ... removing fuel cell from its shipping container inspect cell for damage due to crating or removal from crate 3 Do not use fuel cell nipple fittings as handholds Do not drag fuel cells 4 Stack fuel cells only in original shipping containers 5 Prior to storing used fuel cells clean with soap and warm water 6 Fold fuel cells smoothly and loosely with a minimum number of folds Protective wadding shoul...

Page 345: ...8 11 Reissued July 1 1993 2D24 Repair Kit Goodyear Part No 2F1 3 37813 GROUP I MATERIALS 80C27 Repair Cement 8 Pint cans 320 gms in each 80C28 Cross Linker 8 14 oz bottles 81 cc in each Methylethylketone 2 1 pint cans FT 192 Repair Fabric 2 Sheet 12 x 12 AP368 Manual 1 GROUP II MATERIALS The following equipment is necessary to perform the repair Group II equipment will be furnished at additional c...

Page 346: ...een inner liner and fabric larger than 0 25 of an inch in diameter require an outside and an inside patch f Separations between layers or plies larger than 0 50 inch in diameter require an outside and inside patch Holes and punctures require an outside and inside patch g Slits or tears up to 6 0 inches maximum length require an outside and inside patch h External abraded or scuffed areas without f...

Page 347: ...lication on repair table c Mix the 80C27 cement 320 gms with the cross linker 80C28 81cc and stir mixture thor oughly for five minutes NOTE Cement must be at a minimum of 70 F before mixing Keep away from water and excessive heat d Brush one even coat of mixed repair cement on the cell wall around the injury and on the contact side of the repair patch Allow to dry for fifteen minutes CAUTION Do no...

Page 348: ... clamp Wet cellophane to remove it from repair CAUTION Applying both an outside and inside repair patch simulta neously not recommended l After outside patch has been cured apply inside patch using same procedure as above except for side of repair patch see Limitations paragraph J 3 CAUTION For each 10 F drop in temperature from 75 F add 20 hours cure time For example at 65 F cure for 92 hours 5 A...

Page 349: ...tside and inside repair patch 3 Loose Seams a Buff loose edges and contact surfaces with emery cloth b Wash three times with Mehtylethylketone c Apply 80C27 mixed cement in two coats as with a repair patch d Clamp and cure Cure by either heat cure or air cure method e Loose seams may be trimmed if a minimum lap remains 4 Loose Fitting Flange Inside a Buff the edge of the flange and the contact sur...

Page 350: ...henolphthalein solution that is not in immediate use should be stored in a closed rust proof container to prevent evaporation and deterioration 9 After test remove all plates and test equipment Allow cell to air out 3 In conducting either test outlined above the cell need not be confined by a cage or jig providing the 1 4 psi pressure is not exceeded N Outboard Fuel Cell Installation Refer to Figu...

Page 351: ...ten clamps 3 If fuel line connections continue to leak a Drain tanks b Replace hose connections P Locking Fuel Cap Refer to Figure 5 The locking fuel cap is an optional equipment item When the optional locking fuel cap is installed the optional ignition and door lock kit is also installed thereby allowing the use of one key to operate all of the locks 1 Disassembly of Locking Fuel Cap a Remove the...

Page 352: ...t Locking Fuel Cap Assembly Figure 5 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 28 10 00 Page 28 18 Reissued July 1 1993 2E7 SPRING KEYLOCK O RING 39822 2 GASKET LOCK PAWL ASSEMBLY SPRING GASKET PAWL LOCK 66615 0 GASKET 39822 3 GASKET ...

Page 353: ... INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 28 10 00 Page 28 19 Reissued July 1 1993 2E8 ...

Page 354: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 28 10 00 Page 28 20 Reissued July 1 1993 2E9 ...

Page 355: ...sket Replace if necessary e Filter discs may be cleaned as follows 1 Plug open ends of filter disc center with stoppers to prevent dirt from entering CAUTION Do not use acetone methylethylketone etc to clean nylon fil ter discs 2 Wash metallic filter disc in acetone gasoline carbon tetrachloride trichlorethylene per machor or Bendix cleaner Wash nylon filter disc with soap and water 3 Remove stubb...

Page 356: ...Flush each tank should opening tank drain and adding two or three gallons of clean fuel While fuel is draining raise and lower airplane wing to allow the fuel to rinse any contamination remaining in tank out drain 3 After fuel selector valve is installed and the aircraft refueled a Disconnect fuel inlet line to injector b Turn electric fuel pump ON to flush lines c While flushing move fuel selecto...

Page 357: ... outlet lines e On PA 32R 301T disconnect vent tube from bottom of pump f Remove pump by removing pump attachment hardware 2 Electric Fuel Pump Installation a Position pump in airplane Secure with attachment hardware b On PA 32R 301T connect vent tube to bottom of pump c Connect pump inlet and outlet lines d Install floor panel in airplane and secure with screws Install center seats and seat belt ...

Page 358: ...PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 28 20 00 Page 28 24 Reissued July 1 1993 2E13 ...

Page 359: ... gauges while installed in airplane a PA 32R 301 SP and 32R 301T airplanes refer to Figure 7 1 Level airplane laterally and longitudinally refer to Leveling Chapter 8 1 2 Place fuel selector lever in OFF position 3 Completely drain fuel tanks that relate to fuel quantity senders and gauge to be checked Refer to Draining Fuel System Chapter 12 NOTE Measure all fuel added with a suitable device 4 Pl...

Page 360: ...inally refer to Leveling Chapter 8 1 2 Place battery switch in OFF position 3 Connect external power supply to airplane using APU connector Adjust to provide 12 to 14 Vdc 4 Desired fuel quantities in side to be tested is obtained by either a Completely drain fuel tanks that relate to fuel quantity senders and gauge to be checked Then add fuel in increments specified in CHART 4 b With tanks complet...

Page 361: ...GE SENDER TOLERANCES PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 28 40 00 Page 28 27 Reissued July 1 1993 2E16 Total Fuel in Tanks Tolerance Side s Being Tested Required Gauge Plus or Minus Resistance Ohms Gallons Reading Needle Widths Both Senders 2 1 2 0 0 1 5 12 1 2 10 3 4 21 22 1 2 20 1 32 32 1 2 30 1 1 2 46 42 1 2 40 1 1 2 63 53 1 2 F 1 1 2 90 ...

Page 362: ...PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 28 40 00 Page 28 28 Reissued July 1 1993 2E17 ...

Page 363: ...CHAPTER 29 HYDRAULIC POWER 2E18 ...

Page 364: ...cing of Oildyne Hydraulic Pump 2G1 July 1 1993 29 10 00 Back Up Landing Gear Extender Actuator Assembly 2G4 July 1 1993 29 10 00 Removal of Back Up Landing Gear Extender Actuator Assembly 2G4 July 1 1993 29 10 00 Installation of Back Up Landing Gear Extender Actuator Assembly 2G4 July 1 1993 29 10 00 Check and Adjustment of Back Up Landing Gear Actuator Assembly 2G7 July 1 1993 29 10 00 Operationa...

Page 365: ... HYDRAULIC POWER TABLE OF CONTENTS EFFECTIVITY CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 29 Cont Effec Page 2 Reissued July 1 1993 2E20 ...

Page 366: ...llation of components and Adjustments and Checks for the operation of the repaired system B Description NOTE PA32R 301 airplanes with s n s 32R 8013001 thru 32R 8613005 and 3213001 thru 3213019 and PA32R 301T air planes with s n s 32R 8029001 thru 32R 8629005 and 3229001 thru 3229003 were originally equipped with Prestolite hydraulic pumps PA32R 301 airplanes with s n 3213020 and up are equipped w...

Page 367: ...I PA32R 301 AIRPLANES WITHS N S 32R 8013001 THRU 32R 8613005 AND 3213001 THRU3213002 AND PA32R 301T AIRPLANES WITH S N S 32R 8029001 THRU 32R 8029110 32R 8029121THRU 32R 8629006 AND 3229001 THRU 3229003MAY BE EQUIPP EDWITH ABACK UP LANDING GEAR EXTENDER REFERTO PIPER SERVICE BULLETIN NO 866A NOSE GEAR UP MAIN GEAR UP M AIN GEA R UP MAIN GEAR HYDRAULIC CYL INDER NOSEGEAR HYDRAULIC CYL INDER RESTRIC...

Page 368: ...Reissued July 1 1993 2E23 RESERVOIR LOW PRESSURE CONTROL 600 200 PSI HIGH PRESSURE CONTROL 2400 200 PSI THERMAL RELIEF 3000 300 200 PSI PRESSURE SWITCH SHUTTLE VALVE NOSE GEAR MAIN GEAR GEAR DOWN EMERGENCY FREE FALL VALVE EMERGENCY GEAR KNOB UP UP RESTRICTOR NIPPLE 0 020 DIA BLEED HOLE RESTRICTOR ELBOW OFF AT 1800 100 PSI ON AT 200 TO 400 PSI DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ...

Page 369: ...em occur To prevent the gear from extending too fast there is a special restrictor nipple on the main gear retraction line This valve is manually controlled by a lever or push pull type cable located between the two pilot seats on the elevator trim quadrant NOTE Beginning with airplane s n s 3213003 and up Piper Aircraft no longer installs the automatic gear extender system Piper kit P N 765 199 p...

Page 370: ...utral when not latched in override An auto extension off light is mounted below the gear selector switch and flashes to indicate whenever the latch is in use The auto extension off light is controlled by a switch and flasher mounted behind the instrument panel Refer to Chapter 32 Landing Gear for a description of the landing gear and associated electrical switches CHART 1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LEADING ...

Page 371: ... then proceed to determine extent of the trouble Chart 2 lists troubles which may be encountered along with their probable cause and suggests a remedy for the trouble involved A hydraulic system operational check may be conducted using Figures 1 or 2 When the trouble has been recognized the first step in troubleshooting is isolat ing the cause Hydraulic system troubles are not always traceable to ...

Page 372: ... MANUAL 29 00 00 Page 29 7 Reissued July 1 1993 2F3 1 2 3 4 5 SEE NOTE 1 6 2 7 8 9 NOTES 1 ADJUST CONNECTOR ON END OF CONTROL CABLE TO OBRTAIN 0 65 IN MAX DIMENSION SHOWN IN FIGURE 6 2 A SPECIAL RESTRICTOR NIPPLE 2 IS INSTALLED ON THE MAIN GEAR RETRACTION LINE DO NOT MISTAKE THIS FOR A STANDARD NIPPLE 1 RIGHT ACTUATING CYLINDER 2 RESTRICTOR NIPPLE SEE NOTE 2 3 BACK UP GEAR EXTENDER ACTUATOR 4 BACK...

Page 373: ...TENANCE MANUAL 29 00 00 Page 29 8 Reissued July 1 1993 2F4 1 2 3 4 5 SEE NOTES 6 2 7 8 NOTES 1 SPECIAL RESTRICTOR NIPPLE 2 IS INSTALLED ON THE MAIN GEAR RETRACTION LINE DO NOT MISTAKE THIS FOR A STANDARD NIPPLE 2 SYSTEM SHOWN WITH LANDING GEAR BACK UP EXTENDER REMOVED REFER TO PIPER SERVICE BULLETIN NO 866A AND PIPER KIT P N 765 199 1 RIGHT ACTUATING CYLINDER 2 RESTRICTOR NIPPLE SEE NOTE 2 3 LANDI...

Page 374: ...ANCE MANUAL 29 00 00 Page 29 9 Reissued July 1 1993 2F5 1 2 3 4 SEE NOTE 6 2 7 8 NOTE SPECIAL RESTRICTOR NIPPLE 2 IS INSTALLED ON THE MAIN GEAR RETRACTION LINE DO NOT MISTAKE THIS FOR A STANDARD NIPPLE 1 RIGHT ACTUATING CYLINDER 2 RESTRICTOR NIPPLE SEE NOTE 3 LANDING GEAR FREE FALL VALVE 4 LEFT ACTUATING CYLINDER 5 EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENDER KNOB 6 NOSE ACTUATING CYLINDER 7 PRESSURE SWITCH 8 PUMP RES...

Page 375: ...E CAUSE REMEDY Landing gear retraction system Landing gear actuator circuit Reset circuit breaker and fails to operate breaker open determine cause for open circuit breaker Landing gear selector circuit Reset circuit breaker and breaker open determine cause for open circuit breaker Landing gear actuator circuit Check wiring wires broken Landing gear selector circuit Check wiring wires broken Safet...

Page 376: ...iary extender switch Replace unit inoperative Hydraulic fluid in reservoir Fill reservoir with hydraulic below operating level fluid Battery low or dead Check condition of battery 1 2 Pressure head air passage Clear obstruction obstructed 1 2 Pressure head hose off Reconnect hose 1 2 Split or hole in diaphragm of Replace diaphragm Refer auxiliary extender to Piper Service Letter No 810 1 If equipp...

Page 377: ...ncomplete Hydraulicl pump inoperative Replace or overhaul pump Hydraulic fluid in reservoir Fill reservoir with hydraulic below operating level fluid Low or dead battery Check condition of battery Landing gear retraction Hydraulic fluid in reservoir Fill reservoir with hydraulic extremely slow below operating level fluid Restriction in hydraulic lines Isolate and check hydraulic lines Shuttle valv...

Page 378: ...extension breaker opens determine cause for overload Landing gear selector circuit Reset circuit breaker and breaker opens determine cause for overload Pump fails to shut off though Pressure switch inoperative Replace switch gear has fully retracted Pressure switch out of Replace switch adjustment Pump retraction solenoid Replace solenoid sticking inboard solenoid Internal leakage of system 1 Chec...

Page 379: ...ent 5 Airplanes not equipped with back up gear extender NOTE The out of adjustment or failed switch may be determined by noting which down light is not ON Pump fails to shut off though Pump extension solenoid Replace solenoid the gear has fully extended sticking out board solenoid Nose gear down limit switch Adjust switch actuator Refer actuator out of adjustment to Adjustment of Nose Gear Down Li...

Page 380: ...eakage External leakage of system Check back up extension unit valve for external leakage Check gear actuating cylinders for external leakage Check for broken or damaged hydraulic lines 4 Prestolite pumps only Return Oildyne pumps to Piper Aircraft via local Piper distributer for overhaul Gear stops part way up but Pump high pressure relief Replace pump pump continues to run valve out of adjustmen...

Page 381: ...s at air speeds Back up extender unit hydraulic Check extender unit above that required valve fails to close spring adjustment Check hydraulic valve for sticking open Checkextenderunitdiaphragm for damage Check for restriction in air pressure and static lines 1 If equipped with back up gear extender 1 Landing gear fails to operate Friction or tight connection Clean free and lubricate all at requir...

Page 382: ...ck up gear extender With gear selector down and Shorted gear up solenoid Replace solenoid three green lights on gear unsafe light comes ON or intermittently ON With gear selector down and Shorted gear up solenoid Replace solenoid three green lights ON pump motor circuit breaker opens With gear unsafe light on pump Shorted gear down solenoid Replace solenoid operates on and off With gear unsafe lig...

Page 383: ...flasher failed Replace flasher 1 If equipped with back up gear extender HYC5005 Piper p n 481 879 Prestolite Oildyne Electrical Characteristics Voltage 14 V d c 14 V d c Rotation Reversible Reversible Polarity Negative ground Negative ground Operating Current 75 amps max at 14 65 amps max at volts both rotations 14 volts both rota tions Operating Time 12 seconds max with a current load of 75 amper...

Page 384: ...29 19 Reissued July 1 1993 2F15 HYC5005 Piper p n 481 879 Prestolite Oildyne Mechanical Characteristics Bearings Absorbent bronze Drive end bearing in upper pump and valve assembly casting Steel ball Thrust between commutator end head and end of armature shaft End Play Armature 005 inch min Adjust by selection of thrust washers on drive end of armature shaft ...

Page 385: ...GRIDS 2F16 THROUGH 2F18 PAGES 29 20 THROUGH 29 22 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 29 00 00 Page 29 20 Reissued July 1 1993 2F16 ...

Page 386: ...Cap or plug all ports 5 Clean exterior of pump using a dry cleaning solvent to remove accumulated dirt and dust B Disassembly of Prestolite Hydraulic Pump Refer to Figure 3 If the airplane is equipped with a faulty Prestolite hydraulic pump it is recommended it be sent to an accredited overhaul facility for disassembly and repair If equipped with an Oildyne hydraulic pump that is found to be fault...

Page 387: ... 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 LOW PRESSURE RELIEF 14 15 16 17 18 HIGH PRESSSURE THERMAL RELIEF 19 20 21 22 23 24 17 25 26 1 MOTOR HEAD 2 BRUSH SPRING 3 BRUSH 4 THROUGH BOLT 5 WIRE LEAD 6 THRUST BALL 7 ARMATURE 8 MOTOR FRAME 9 SLEEVE 10 THRUST WASHER 11 VENT AND FILLER SCREW 12 RESERVOIR 13 SEAL 14 VALVE AND CASE GEAR 15 SCREW 8 16 O RING MS28775 012 17 PUMP BASE 18 STUD PLATE 19 BOLT 20 WASHER 21 GROMMET 22 ...

Page 388: ...ove cap secur ing gears by removing attaching bolts The two valve springs should be positively identified with their cavities to preclude the necessity of readjusting each valve for proper operating pressure C Cleaning Inspection and Repairs of Prestolite Hydraulic Pump CAUTION Repair facilities must be clean to prevent contamination of pump components Proper and careful handling should be exercis...

Page 389: ...to extend over commutator Remove string securing brushes in holders Push head assembly on frame Ensure proper indexing of head and frame assemblies Secure in place with through bolts g Check freedom of rotation and end play thrust of armature within assembly A minimum of 0 005 inch end play is required Adjust to this tolerance as necessary by adding or removing thrust washers on drive end of armat...

Page 390: ...tached lines Lines may be bled by alternately connecting blue lead and green lead to the positive terminal of the power supply until all air is exhausted f Connect blue lead to positive terminal of power supply Pump should operate and the high pressure gauge should indicate a specific pressure as given in Chart 2 refer to 29 00 00 g Disconnect blue lead The high pressure reading should not drop mo...

Page 391: ...tments of Prestolite Hydraulic Pump Figure 4 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 29 10 00 Page 29 28 Reissued July 1 1993 2F24 GROUND BLACK HIGH PRESS BLUE LOW PRESS GREEN H IGH PRESSURE 14 V D C ONE ONLY PORT 1 PORT 3 LOW PRESSU RE 3000 1000 G B LO HI BL 100 AM P FUSE 100 AMP 14 V D C ...

Page 392: ...te pump to purge hydraulic system of air and check for leaks After operation recheck fluid level G Removal of Oildyne Hydraulic Pump The Oildyne hydraulic pump with reservoir incorporated is located in the nose section of the fuselage Access to the pump is through the access panel in the nose baggage compartment To remove pump 1 Disconnect the pump electrical leads from the pump solenoid relays an...

Page 393: ...Pump Figure 5 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 29 10 00 Page 29 30 Reissued July 1 1993 2G2 RESERVOIR SEAL O RING 10 32 X 1 SCREW RESERVOIR DIPSTICK CAUTION AFTER FILLING RESERVOIR TIGHTEN DIPSTICK THEN BACKOFF 1 1 2 TURNS THIS ISREQUIRED TOALLOW RES ERVOIR TO BE VENTED ...

Page 394: ...a shop cloth under actuator hydraulic valve to absorb fluid Disconnect hydraulic tubes from cross and tee Cover open tubes and fittings to prevent contamination e Remove the hardware that secure the actuator base to the mountin brackets There are two mounting bolts at the inboard side of the base and one mounting screw at the outboard side of the diaphragm housing Remove the actuator from the moun...

Page 395: ...W 3 BASE 4 NIPPLE 5 TEE 6 BOLT NUT 7 STATIC HOUSING ASSEMBLY 8 SEAL 9 HOUSING RING 10 PRESSURE HOUSING ASSEMBLY 11 STATIC HOSE 12 ELBOW 13 PRESSURE HOSE 14 NUT 15 TEFLON BUSHING 16 DIAPHRAGM SHAFT 17 CLEVIS PIN 18 LINK 19 ACTUATING ARM 20 SCREW 21 PUMP SWITCH 22 SCREW NUT 23 ACTUATOR SWITCH 24 SPRINGS 25 HYDRAULIC VALVE 26 TUBE 27 ELBOW 28 JAM NUT 29 ANCHOR 30 PUSH ROD 31 SPACER 32 ADJUSTMENT NUT ...

Page 396: ...are NOTE Use care should when attaching forward hose to diaphragm assembly so that no strain is placed on teflon bushing and diaphragm shaft thus causing friction in movement d Connect hydraulic tubes to respective tees e Connect the pressure and static hoses to the elbows of the diaphragm housing Secure hoses with clamps f Connect the actuator electrical leads terminal to their mating terminals a...

Page 397: ...nd in Operational Check of Retractable Landing Gear System 2 Adjustment of landing gear back up extender actuator is preset to allow hydraulic valve of actuator to open when airspeed is reduced below 103 KIAS with the engine power OFF Adjustment is accomplished by setting tension of spring on actuator with adjustment screw as follows WARNING While making adjustments do not lay tools in area expose...

Page 398: ...not to disturb the position of eccentric bolt 35 Figure 6 in relation to the rest of the unit h With the glide established turn the adjustment screw clockwise until the gear drops First indication of gear dropping will be that the gear unsafe light comes ON i Climb again to a safe altitude and check that the gear drops at the correct airspeed j Land the airplane and tighten the adjustment screw ja...

Page 399: ... lock Move gear selector switch down Release override lever Gear should remain down 2 Up Set maximum climb power Maintain approximately 70 KIAS for approximately 15 seconds Move gear selector switch to up position The gear should not retract Pull over ride lever up Gear should retract Allow airspeed to increase to at least 113 KIAS Release override lever gear should remain up d Back Up Extender Ge...

Page 400: ...switch setting is checked as follows With gear up reduce throttle at a normal rate The gear warning horn and the red light should come on at 14 2 inches of manifold pressure 2 Airplanes not equipped with back up gear extender a Maximum Gear Extend 1 PA32R 301 SP 301T SP Place the gear selector in the down position at 132 KIAS In approximately 5 to 10 seconds the three green gear lights should be o...

Page 401: ...anifold pressure e Flap Landing Gear Position Warning Horn With landing retracted extend flaps Check that horn sounds before flaps reach 25 position but not before reaching or at 10 position L Removal and Installation of Hydraulic Lines Remove a damaged hydraulic line by disconnecting fitting at each end and by disconnecting where secured by brackets Refer to Figure 2 as an aid in the location of ...

Page 402: ...f combination pump and reservoir at least every 50 hours b To check fluid level 1 Remove filler plug located on forward side of pump 2 Check that fluid is within 1 2 inch of bottom of filler plug hole 3 If fluid is below this level add MIL to bring lH5606A fluid through filler hole 4 Install filler plug and tighten NOTE A small vent hole is located under vent screw head Retain 1 64 inch clearance ...

Page 403: ...GRIDS 2G12 THROUGH 2G15 PAGES 29 40 THRIUGH 29 42 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 29 10 00 Page 29 40 Reissued July 1 1993 2G12 ...

Page 404: ...CHAPTER 30 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION 2G16 ...

Page 405: ...July 1 1993 30 10 00 Cold Repair 2H6 July 1 1993 30 10 00 Tube Area Damage 2H6 July 1 1993 30 10 00 Vulcanized Repairs 2H7 July 1 1993 30 10 00 Installing Pneumatic Boots 2H9 July 1 1993 30 10 00 Preparation of Leading Edges 2H9 July 1 1993 30 10 00 Preparation of Deicer Boot 2H10 July 1 1993 30 10 00 Mounting Boot on Leading Edge 2H10 July 1 1993 30 10 00 Adhesion Test 2H11 July 1 1993 30 10 00 M...

Page 406: ...Resistance Check of Deicer Blade 2I10 July 1 1993 30 60 00 Replacement 2I10 July 1 1993 30 60 00 Repair of Deicer Lead Strap 2I11 July 1 1993 30 60 00 Removal of Deicer 2I12 July 1 1993 30 60 00 Blade Preparation 2I12 July 1 1993 30 60 00 Cement Application 2I12 July 1 1993 30 60 00 Installation of Deicer and Required Materials 2I13 July 1 1993 30 60 00 Preparation and Application of Sealer 2I15 J...

Page 407: ...r each flight Attached to flight surface with cement boots are connected to the plumbing through skin by flexible and or aluminum air connections Operation of pneumatic deice system is controlled by a momentary single pole single throw switch on control panel refer to Figure 3 During normal operation vacuum provided continuously from pump inlet is directed to boots system through deice flow valves...

Page 408: ...ish is glossy Each deicer has separate lead for inboard and a third lead which is a common ground These leads are so marked An unmarked ground can be identified by using an ohmmeter across three possible pairs of leads One pair will show twice resistance of other pairs Latter are hot leads and lead excluded from pair that shows twice resistance of other pairs is ground lead To transfer electrical ...

Page 409: ...ft of pilot s side of instrument panel Other parts of system s include a heated pitot head heated lift detectors inner and outer and two circuit breakers one for each part of the system For seeing and detecting ice at night an ice detecting light can also be included with systems Light controlled by a switch on deice control panel is mounted on left side of forward baggage compartment NOTE Refer t...

Page 410: ...ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION Cont B Description and Operation cont Pneumatc Deice System Installation Figure 1 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 00 00 Page 30 4 Reissued July 1 1993 2G22 ...

Page 411: ... PROTECTION Cont B Description and Operation cont Pneumatic Deicer Boot Operation Figure 2 Deice Control Panel Figure 3 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 00 00 Page 30 5 Reissued July 1 1993 2G23 ...

Page 412: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 00 00 Page 30 6 Reissued July 1 1993 2G24 ...

Page 413: ...ach flight For operation descriptions refer to general description at beginning of chapters B Troubleshooting The troubleshooting chart contained herein is based on the premise except as specified that engine driven pneumatic pumps and electrical system are operating properly It is further assumed that system components were installed properly CHART 1 TROUBLESHOOTING PNEUMATIC DEICE SYSTEM Sheet 1...

Page 414: ...blocked Inspect and blow out lines Deflate valve not functioning Insure that both vent ports on properly solenoid are open Deicers inflate indicator Indicator lamp burned out Replace lamp light does not function Check that deicer boot switch is ON System pressure not being Check Deicers Inflate Slowly reached above Pressure switch not Make electrical test and replace functioning if required Wires ...

Page 415: ...eck timing of system through several complete cycles Boots ON six seconds then OFF Wing and empennage boots operate separately If cycle time is off specified time determine and correct the difficulty Inflation must be rapid to provide efficient deicing Deflation should be complete before next inflation cycle of the boots E 100 Hour Inspection 1 Make the following checks at each 100 hour inspection...

Page 416: ...seconds as evidenced by an audible click If solenoid valve does not function a Disconnect electrical connector at solenoid Attach test light or other suitable test equipment to connector and activate system switch If test equipment does not indicate complete circuit 1 Check circuit from timer to solenoid connector to ground 2 Replace timer b Use ohmmeter to check solenoid for open circuit If solen...

Page 417: ... well ventilated area to avoid difficulty from solvent fumes Materials required to remove boots are Kelite A 727 B and a pressure handle squirt can Proceed as follows NOTE Disconnect line fittings from boot fittings a Starting at one corner of upper trailing edge apply a minimum amount of solvent to seam line while tension is applied to peel back corner of deicer b Using a pressure handle squirt c...

Page 418: ... with an edge or center adhering first Work down remainder of patch carefully to avoid trapping air pockets Thoroughly roll patch with stitcher roller Part No 74 451 73 and allow to set for ten to fifteen minutes d Wipe patch and surrounding area from center outward with a cloth slightly damp ened with solvent Apply one light coat of 3M EC 801 cement to seal and feather edge of patch to deicer e S...

Page 419: ...ith a hypodermic needle 5 Clean excess cement from deicer with solvent d Loose Surface Ply in Tube Area Loose surface ply in tube area is usually an indication of deicer starting to flex fail This type of failure is more easily detected in form of a blister under surface ply when deicer is pressurized If this type of damage or void is detected while still a small blister about 1 4 or 3 8 inch diam...

Page 420: ... pt No 4 Cement patching only 74 451 70 2 Cement Brush 1 2 in 74 451 73 1 1 8 in Steel Stitcher 74 451 75 6 Emery Buffing Sticks 74 451 87 1 Buffing Shield This cement will give best results with the patches in this kit The following items may be procured from the B F Goodrich Co Akron Ohio or other manufacturer as required 74 451 21 6 ft roll x 6 in wide Type 21 or 22 Fillet 74 451 22 15 ft roll ...

Page 421: ...st twice with MEK or Acetone For final cleaning wipe solvent film off quickly with a clean dry cloth before it has time to dry NOTE It is permissible to install deicers on alodined or anodized surfaces 3 Fill gaps of skin splices that lead under deicers with sealing compound EC 801 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 10 00 Page 30 15 Reissued July 1 1993 2H9 Part No Quantity Descr...

Page 422: ...y wire 1 Holding backside of boot close to leading edge fasten end of each non kink hose to cor responding air connection stem Tinnerman or other suitable non kink hose clamps should be used for this purpose Tighten each clamp with a pair of slip joint pliers but do not squeeze clamp so tight that hose is damaged NOTE If non kink hose clamps are not available wrap each hose connec tion with severa...

Page 423: ...or installation are flammable and their fumes slightly toxic Therefore all work should be done in a well ventilated area away from any sparks or flames Use of solvent resistant type gloves is recommended NOTE Application of A 56 B conductive cement is not necessary on deicers that have CONDUCTIVE noted on labels In the event it becomes necessary to remove or loosen installed boots use MEK or Toluo...

Page 424: ...soap and water solution Do not use petroleum products to clean boots as these are injurious to rubber In cold weather wash boots with airplane inside a warm hangar if possible If cleaning is to be done outdoors heat soap and water solution before taking it out to the airplane If difficulty is encountered with water freezing on boots direct a blast of warm air along region being cleaned using a por...

Page 425: ... required to remove and replace old damaged coating 1 Fine grit sandpaper 2 Two inch paint brush 3 One inch masking tape 4 Conductive neoprene cement No A 56 B B F Goodrich Company 5 Isopropyl Acetate Federal Specification TT I 721 as cleaning or thinning solvent 6 Alternate solvent Toluol or Toluene may be used as an alternate for Isopropyl Acetate CAUTION Cements and solvents used for resurfacin...

Page 426: ... inch psi pressure gauge in line Gauge must be readable to 2 psi in the 25 psi range CAUTION During all engine operations exercise caution to avoid harm or damage to personnel and equipment by propeller and propeller blast 5 Start engine and attain 2400 RPM 6 Check vacuum gauge to ensure that an indication of 3 5 to 4 0 in Hg has been attained Adjust regulator if required 7 Decrease power and atta...

Page 427: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 10 00 Page 30 21 Reissued July 1 1993 2H15 ...

Page 428: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 10 00 Page 30 22 Reissued July 1 1993 2H16 ...

Page 429: ...d the pitot system however can be installed by itself using the same spot for the switch as previously mentioned These systems are quite simple in that they contain a heated pitot head and heated lift detectors The units for these installations are installed on the left wing Refer to Chapters 27 and 34 for removal and installation procedures Refer to Chapter 91 for wiring diagrams schematics THIS ...

Page 430: ...PITOT AND STATIC Cont Heated Pitot and Stall Warning System Installation Figure 4 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 30 00 Page 30 24 Reissued July 1 1993 2H18 ...

Page 431: ...EMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HEATED PANEL 1 Disconnect electrical connector located next to heated panel on exterior side of windshield by removing two screws and pulling plug out of receptacle 2 Remove two screws which attach panel assembly to windshield collar and remove panel from air plane 3 If airplane is to be flown with heated panel removed rotate receptacle plate 180 and replace it to cover ...

Page 432: ...WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELD Cont PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 40 00 Page 30 26 Reissued July 1 1993 2H20 ...

Page 433: ...ing gear of engine The timer is a sealed unit If found inoperative it must be replaced as an assembly no field repairs are authorized The ammeter is designed for each particular system and it is therefore important that correct replacement part number be used if replacement should be required In event of low aircraft battery voltage very possible in ground checks ammeter readings will be lower tha...

Page 434: ... at ammeter If low or zero output zero replace the ammeter and input satisfactory replace ammeter If no voltage to ammeter locate and fix open between switch and ammeter Open ammeter to timer Disconnect harness at timer and check voltage at pin B of harness to ground If none locate and correct open Ammeter shows normal current Open in wiring between timer Use heat test to find deicers not part of ...

Page 435: ...ycle Open in deicer or slip ring leads Disconnect deicer straps to check heater resistance as in Electrical Check If satisfactory locate and fix open in slip ring leads High resistance in circuit with If not in contact of brush to slip low current ring including ground brush trace wiring to deicer and to timer to fix partially broken wire loose or corroded connection Ammeter shows low current Airc...

Page 436: ...d with ohmmeter check from power leads to ground If ground is indicated locate and correct Ground between brush block If no short exists at brush slip and deicers Excluding ground ring contact check for ground brush circuit from slip ring lead to propeller assembly while flexing slip ring and deicer leads If a ground is indicated locate and correct Short between two adjacent Check for cuts or low ...

Page 437: ...ller are affected check the ground circuit Flex deicer straps to check for break Timer cycles erratically Test timer as in Timer Test at end of chapter Radio noise or interference with Brushes arcing Check brush alignment as deicers on shown in Figures 11 and 13 Look for rough or dirty slip rings If this is the cause clean machine or replace slip ring assembly as required Check slip ring alignment...

Page 438: ...PROPELLER DEICING SYTEM Cont Heated Propeller Installation Optional Figure 6 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 60 00 Page 30 32 Reissued July 1 1993 2I2 ...

Page 439: ...ICING SYTEM Cont Electrical Diagram Showing Cycle Sequence Figure 7 Electrical Diagram Showing Cycle Sequence Figure 8 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 60 00 Page 30 33 Reissued July 1 1993 2I3 ...

Page 440: ... proved to be fully workable when tested Accomplish test described in Timer Test at end of this chapter before concluding that timer is defective E INSPECTION 1 50 HOUR INSPECTION a Lock brakes and operate engine at near take off power Turn deicer system switch ON and observe deicer ammeter for at least two minutes Ammeter needle must rest within shaded band except for a flicker approximately ever...

Page 441: ...d or if wobble is noticed set up dial indicator as shown in figure 30 9 to check alignment of slip rings to propeller shaft g Brush Block Brushes Examine mounting brackets and housing for cracks deformation or other physical damage 1 Test that each brush rides fully on its slip ring over 360 Figure 10 shows wear pattern if this condition is not corrected If alignment is off shim where brush block ...

Page 442: ...ICING SYTEM Cont E INSPECTION Cont Typical Use of Dial Indicator Figure 9 Centering of Brushes on Slip Rings Figure 10 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 60 00 Page 30 36 Reissued July 1 1993 2I6 ...

Page 443: ...r since springs are of slightly larger diameter than brush slots in block and must be fed into cylindrical grooves provided c Reassemble brush block to mounting brackets utilizing hardware previously removed 3 ATTACHING INDIVIDUAL BRUSHES TO BRUSH RETAINER a Remove brush retainer assembly per Brush Replacement Step 2 b Compress springs by pushing brushes back into brush retainer assembly and hold ...

Page 444: ...should be held to 125 maximum k Wipe flux from leads and connector pin l Pull tubing up over connector pins to insure that no electrical shorts exist and if necessary bend leads away from each other m Reinstall connector plug to brush block utilizing hardware previously removed n Carefully remove rubber bands from brushes o Assemble brush block per Repairing Brush Block Assembly Step 2 p Check for...

Page 445: ... parallel within 0 005 inch and flat within 0 005 inch overall deviation from flat not to exceed 0 002 inch over a 4 inch arc If necessary undercut insulation between slip rings to a depth of 030 inch below contact surface of slip rings In this operation width of slip ring must be reduced more than 005 inch Contact surface of slip rings must have a finish of 29 35 micro inches De burr slip ring ed...

Page 446: ...r three bladed propellers If this reading is not obtained disconnect the deicer lead straps to measure heater resistance individually Individual heater should be 4 58 to 5 26 If first check is off limits but second check is satisfactory trouble is probably in brush to slip ring area if second check is off limits deicer is damaged and must be replaced 2 REPLACEMENT If tests show blade deicer to hav...

Page 447: ...ne hour above 40F Apply second even coat of 1300L cement and allow to dry c Cut the patch 020 thick rubber to about 1 4 inch large on all sides of damaged area Protective paper is on side to be cemented Apply masking tape on open side to prevent patch from curling as cement dries then strip off protective paper and apply 1300L cement in smooth even coat Allow to air dry After one hour apply second...

Page 448: ... and stick pattern to leading edge Mark position of deicr lead strap where it crosses hub NOTE All deicers on a single propeller must be located same distance from hub for rotational balance c Remove pattern and remove any paint in marked off area Clean down to bare metal Next clean area thoroughly with MEK or acetone For final cleaning wipe solvent off quickly with a clean dry lint free cloth to ...

Page 449: ...exactly to insure maximum adhesion to proper blades a When cement coats are tacky dry on both propeller surface and deicer surface proceed as follows Required Materials for Repair of Propeller Deicer The materials and tools listed below are commercially available and are not supplied by B F Goodrich in kit form NOTE MEK can be used instead of Toluol to tackify cement however tests show that MEK ca...

Page 450: ...ELLER DEICING SYTEM Cont H DEICER BLADES Cont Installation of Deicer Boot Figure 14 Wrinkled Deicers Figure 15 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 60 00 Page 30 44 Reissued July 1 1993 2I14 ...

Page 451: ...s may be ordered from B F Goodrich Company 8 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION OF SEALER Deicers loosened due to destruction of adhesive bond by lubricants do not respond well to recementing Therefore removal cleaning and reinstallation of deicers are recommended Refer to Removal of Deicer and Installation of Deicer a Clean an area 500 inch wide around circumference of deicer down to bare metal Use MEK ...

Page 452: ...er to Figure 15 If edge of deicer is found wrinkled or loose try recementing Use MEK or Toluol to loosen the bond for an additional 1 4 inch beyond the loose or wrinkled area Apply one coat of 1300L cement to the deicer and propeller bonding surfaces and allow to air dry for one hour Then apply a second coat of 1300L cement to both the deicer and bonding surface Allow to dry Retackify with MEK or ...

Page 453: ... ground and either of the other terminals iso 4 58 to 5 26 NOTE These resistances apply only to deicers that are not connected to terminal studs Propeller Blade in Low Pitch Figure 18 11 INSTALLATION OF DEICER STRAPS AND WIRE HARNESS a Deicer lead strap is fastened to bulkhead in same positions from which they were removed b Deicer strap is to be attached to studs on spinner bulkhead CAUTION Never...

Page 454: ...ng system to insure that deicer lead straps are installed in such manner that propeller can be moved from full low pitch through feathering position without placing straps in tension NOTE Deicers should have a piece of grayplastic bonded to air side shiny side of deicer strap as shown in Figure 18 Strap restrainers should be positioned as shown in Figure 19 when propeller blades are in full feathe...

Page 455: ...t have been used for making final electrical check 14 OTHER COMPONENTS Do not attempt internal repairs of timer ammeter or switch If inoperative these components must be replaced with one of correct part number For any other other repair or maintenance prob lems not covered in this manual inquire at Aerospace and Defense Products Divison of B F Goodrich Company Akron Ohio 44318 15 TIMER TEST Prop ...

Page 456: ...rom pin A of wiring harness to contact A of timer With jumper wires in place turn on power at deicer switch Using a voltmeter check for voltage at timer contacts D and F System voltage will be volts D C The timer will cycle with 14 volts D C between pins D and F approximately every 90 seconds and verify zero voltage on deenergized contact d If timer meets these requirements it is not cause of trou...

Page 457: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 60 00 Page 30 51 Reissued July 1 1993 2I21 ...

Page 458: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 60 00 Page 30 52 Reissued July 1 1993 2I22 ...

Page 459: ...er 2 Remove access panel screws and access panel being careful of light assembly wiring 3 Remove screws to light assembly wiring 4 Remove screws securing light assembly to tube assembly 5 Slide light assembly out of tube assembly to replace lamp or light assembly C INSTALLATION OF ICE VIEWING LIGHT 1 Slide light assembly into tube assembly and secure with appropriate screws 2 Reconnect wiring to l...

Page 460: ...GRIDS 2I24 THROUGH 2L24 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 30 80 00 Page 30 54 Reissued July 1 1993 2I24 ...

Page 461: ...II HP MAINTENANCE MANUAL PA 32R 301 SARATOGA SP PA 32R 301 SARATOGA II HP PA 32R 301T SARATOGA SP Card 3 of 4 THIS HANDBOOK INCLUDES THE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION REQUIRED TO BE AVAILABLE BY FAR PART 23 Courtesy of Bomar Flying Service www bomar biz ...

Page 462: ...craft Corporation All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of the Piper Aircraft Corporation except for the inclusion of brief quotations in a review ...

Page 463: ...EFFECTIVITY CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY INTRODUCTION 3A3 July 1 1993 System Chapter Index Guide 3A3 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32 R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Introduction Contents Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 3A3 ...

Page 464: ...10 1C7 Time Limits 20 1C8 Scheduled Maintenance 50 1D2 Unscheduled Maintenance Checks 6 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 00 1D8 General 7 LIFTING AND SHORING 10 1D23 Jacking 8 LEVELING AND WEIGHING 10 1E3 Weighing and Balancing 20 1E4 Leveling 9 TOWING AND TAXIING 10 1E7 Towing 20 1E8 Taxiing 10 PARKING AND MOORING 10 1E11 Parking 20 1E12 Mooring 11 REQUIRED PLACARDS 20 1E15 Exterior Placards and Markings 30 ...

Page 465: ...OWER 00 1K1 General 30 1K3 DC Generation 40 1L19 External Power 50 1L21 Electrical Load Distribution 25 EQUIPMENT FURNISHINGS 10 2A15 Flight Compartment 27 FLIGHT CONTROLS 00 2A23 General 10 2B7 Aileron and Tab 20 2B18 Rudder and Tab 30 2C5 Elevator and Tab 50 2C21 Flaps 28 FUEL 00 2D14 General 10 2D20 Storage 20 2E10 Distribution 40 2E14 Indicating 29 HYDRAULIC POWER 00 2E21 General 10 2F19 Main ...

Page 466: ...ar and Doors 30 3C16 Extension and Retraction 40 3C22 Wheels and Brakes 60 3D18 Position and Warning 33 LIGHTS 00 3E2 General Compartment 10 3E6 Flight Compartment 40 3E8 Exterior 34 NAVIGATION AND PITOT STATIC 00 3E14 General 10 3E18 Flight Instrtuments Pitot Static 20 3E22 Attitude Direction 40 3F2 Independent Position Determining 35 OXYGEN 00 3F10 General 10 3F12 Crew Passenger 37 VACUUM 00 3G8...

Page 467: ... 55 STABILIZERS 10 3I6 Horizontal Stabilizers 30 3I12 Vertical Stabilizer 40 3I14 Rudder 56 WINDOWS 10 3I18 Flight Compartment 20 3I20 Cabin 57 WINGS 00 3J2 General 20 3J4 Auxiliary Structure 40 3J6 Attach Fittings 50 3J12 Flight Surfaces 61 PROPELLERS 10 3J20 Propeller Assembly 20 3K6 Controlling 70 STANDARD PRACTICES ENGINE 00 3K12 General 71 POWER PLANT 00 3K16 General 10 3L6 Cowling PIPER AIRC...

Page 468: ...ng 77 ENGINE INDICATING 00 4C13 General 10 4C13 Power 20 4C16 Temperature 78 EXHAUST 00 4C23 General 79 OIL 20 4D7 Distribution 30 4D7 Indicating 80 STARTING 00 4D11 General 10 4D15 Cranking 81 TURBINES 20 4E1 Turbo Supercharger 91 CHARTS WIRING DIAGRAMS 00 4E16 General 10 4F19 Electrical Schematics 95 SPECIAL PURPOSE EQUIPMENT 00 4J8 Special Purpose Equipment END PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32 R 301 301T M...

Page 469: ...GRIDS 3A9 THROUGH 3A12 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32 R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Introduction Page 6 Reissued July 1 1993 3A9 ...

Page 470: ...CHAPTER 32 LANDING GEAR 3A13 ...

Page 471: ... 1993 32 10 00 Main Gear Door Assembly 3B 16 July 1 1993 32 10 00 Removal of Main Gear Door Assembly 3B16 July 1 1993 32 10 00 Cleaning Inspection and Repair of Main Gear Door Assembly 3B 16 July I 1993 32 10 00 Installation of Main Gear Door 32 10 00 Assembly 3B16 July 1 1993 32 10 00 Main Gear Service Tolerances 3B18 July 1 1993 32 20 00 NOSE GEAR 3B22 July 1 1993 32 20 00 Nose GearOleo 3B22 Jul...

Page 472: ...ctuating Cylinder 3C17 July 1 1993 32 30 00 Assembly of Nose Gear Actuating Cylinder 3C17 July 1 1993 32 30 00 Installation of Nose Gear Actuating Cylinder 3C17 July 1 1993 32 30 00 Main Gear Actuating Cylinder 3C17 July 1 1993 32 30 00 Removal of Main Gear Actuating Cylinder 3C 17 July 1 1993 32 30 00 Disssembly of Main Gear Actuating Cylinder 3C18 July 1 1993 32 30 00 Cleaning Inspection and Rep...

Page 473: ...ssembly and Installation of Wheel BrakeAssembly 3DS July 1 1993 32 40 00 Brake Master Cylinder Hand Parking Brake 3DS July 1 1993 32 40 00 Removal of Brake Master Cylinder Hand Brake 3DS July 1 1993 32 40 00 Disassembly of Brake Master Cylinder 3D7 July 1 1993 32 40 00 Cleaning Inspection and Repair of Brake Master Cylinder 3D7 July 1 1993 32 40 00 Assembly of Brake Master Cylinder 3D8 July 1 1993...

Page 474: ...Dl9 July 1 1993 32 60 00 Adjustment of Main Gear Up Lirnit Switch 3Dl9 July 1 1993 32 60 00 Adjustment of Main Gear Down Lirnit Switch 3D20 July 1 1993 32 60 00 Adjustment of Landing Gear Safety Switch Squat Switch 3D20 July 1 1993 32 60 00 Adjustment of Gear Back Up Extender Actuator Switch 3D21 July 1 1993 32 60 00 Landing Gear Warning Switches Throttle Switches 3D21 July 1 1993 32 60 00 Landing...

Page 475: ...rn Both serve a dual pur pose Their primary purpose is to give warning when power is reduced below approximately 14 inches of manifold pressure and the landing gear has not reached the down and locked position This circuit is controlled by the three paralleling down limit switches connected in series with the throttle switch The secondary function of the warning light and horn is to give warning w...

Page 476: ...landing gear to extend when opened by the operation of a push pull cable knob which is located between the two pilot seats When using the manual extention latch or knob the gear position is controlled by the selector switch regardless of airspeed or power combinations An override latch mechanism is installed in the backup automatic gear extension system designed to bypass the automatic feature of ...

Page 477: ...ARN annunciator out light while gear is in transit Indicator light circuit Check wiring wire broken Indicator light circuit Reset circuit breaker breaker open and determine cause for open circuit breaker PA 32R 301 SP 301T SP One or more up limit Isolate and replace Red gear unsafe light on switches failed switch though gear has retracted or Nose gear up limit Check gear up adjustment PA 32R 301 I...

Page 478: ...n switch adjustment PA 32R 301 SP 301T SP Red gear unsafe light out and Lamp burned out Replace lamp one green gear down light out though gear is down and locked Gear down limit switch failed Replace switch or PA 32R 301 II HP Light circuit wire broken Check wiring Red GEAR WARN annunciator out and one green gear down light out hough gear is down and locked NOTE Verify navigation lights are off da...

Page 479: ... A failed Replace switch throttle is near closed and anding gear is retracted Warning horn and light circuit Check wiring wire broken Diode in circuit between throttle Replace diode switch A and light horn open NOTE When replacing diode connect banded end cathode to terrminal ends of wires G2Q and G2K on mounting block PA 32R 301 SP 301T SP Red gear unsafe light and horn Gear selector handle in up...

Page 480: ...ll forward Above condition on ground Defective safety squat switch Replace switch PA 32R 301 SP 301T SP Hydraulic pump shuts off but Gear not fully retracted Checkgearretractionadjust red gear unsafe light remains on ments or Gear not contacting up micro Check gear up switches PA 32R 301 II HP switches Hydraulic pump shuts off but Red GEAR WARN annunciator remains on PA 32R 301 SP 301T SP or PA 32...

Page 481: ...adjustment Adjust microswitch momentarily before the down lock is engaged on roller PA 32R 301 SP 301T SP or PA 32R 301 II HP Nose landing gear shimmies Internal wear in shimmy Replace shimmy dampener during fast taxi take off dampener or landing Shimmy dampener or Replace necessary parts and bracket loose at mounting bolts Tire out of balance Check balance and replace tire if necessary Worn or lo...

Page 482: ...oller sheared at Replace defective roller top of strut Steering bellcrank loose on Readjust and tighten attachment plate Steering bellcrank bearing Replace bearing and or and or bolt worn bolt Shimmy dampener galling Replace or binding PA 32R 301 SP 301T SP or PA 32R 301 II HP Nose gear fails to straighten Steering arm roller sheared at Replace defective roller when landing gear extends top of str...

Page 483: ... II HP Excessive or uneven wear on Incorrect operating pressure Inflate tire to correct pressure main tires Wheel out of alignment Check wheel alignment toe in or out Lower side brace link out of Check gear adjustment adjustment allowing gear to slant in or out PA 32R 301 SP 301T SP or PA 32R 301 II HP Strut bottoms on normal Insufficient air and or Service strut with air landing or taxiing on rou...

Page 484: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 00 00 Page 32 10 Reissued July 1 1993 3B3 ...

Page 485: ...MAIN GEAR Main Gear Oleo Strut Assembly Figure 1 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 10 00 Page 32 11 Reissued July 1 1993 3B4 ...

Page 486: ...MAIN GEAR Cont Main Gear Oleo Strut Assembly Figure 1 Sheet 2 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 10 00 Page 32 12 Reissued July 1 1993 3B5 ...

Page 487: ...hickness of spacer washer s between two links 6 Compress piston tube reach up into tube and release snap ring from annular slot at bottom of oleo housing 7 Pull piston tube with component parts from cylinder housing 8 Piston tube components may be removed by reaching in tube and pushing out upper bearing retainer pins Slide off upper bearing with O rings wiper and washer 9 To remove orifice tube f...

Page 488: ...MAIN GEAR Cont Main Gear Installation Figure 2 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 10 00 Page 32 14 Reissued July 1 1993 3B7 ...

Page 489: ...AM NUT 23 ROD PISTON 24 CYLINDER HYDRAULIC ACTUATING 25 BOLT WASHERS NUT AND COTTER PIN 26 STUD SlDE BRACE SUPPORT 27 SUPPORT BRACKET 28 LINK UPPER SIDE BRACE 29 PLATE 30 HOOK DOWNLOCK 31 BOLT WASHERS NUT AND COTTER PIN 32 PIN DOWNLOCK 33 LINK LOWER SIDE BRACE 34 BRACKET SPRING 35 SWITCH SAFETY 36 ACTUATOR SAFETY SWITCH 37 BOLT WASHERS NUT AND COTTER PIN 38 ROD GEAR DOOR 39 BOLT WASHERS NUT AND CO...

Page 490: ...be up through housing With end of tube exposed through top of housing install o ring retainer washer and locknut Tighten locknut only finger tight at this time 6 Assemble components of piston tube on tube by placing in order snap ring washer lower bearing with outer and inner o ring and upper bearing Align two 125 diameter holes and lock pin holes with corresponding holes in piston tube and instal...

Page 491: ...ce support fitting by removing cap bolts securing fitting to web of spar f Remove assembly and further disassemble and inspect as needed 3 Strut housing with components may be removed by following procedure a Disconnect brake line at its upper end in wheel well b Disconnect gear door actuating rod at gear housing c Remove access plate located on underside of wing aft of landing gear d If not previ...

Page 492: ...embled and checked ascertain that when stop surfacess of the two links contact clearance between each downlock hook and flat of downlock pin is not less than 0 010 of an inch Should clearance be less than that required hook only may be filed not to exceed a gap of more than 0 025 of an inch Maximum allowable clearance between each hook and downlock pin that are service worn is 0 055 of an inch Sho...

Page 493: ...ing gear c Attach upper link to swivel stud of support fitting and secure with bolt bushing washer nut and copper pin d Actuating cylinder rod end bearing and lower side brace link may be attached respectively to retraction fitting and strut housing during adjustment of landing gear 4 Ascertain that landing gear is lubricated per Lubrication Chart Chapter 12 5 Check adjustment of landing gear per ...

Page 494: ... When gear is to within 125 of an inch of correct adjustment rod end need not be discon nected and therefore all that will be required is to loosen jam nut place a wrench on the flat at end of piston rod and turn to obtain correct adjustment g Check rod end bearing for adequate thread engagement and tighten jam nut h If downlock limit switch is properly adjusted retract and extend gear hydro elect...

Page 495: ...n place If large machine surface of link is inboard bracket is mounted with small rivet hole next to link Refer to Sketch A figure 32 3 This hole should be aligned with centerline of link and a 096 inch hold drilled 150 inch deep Insert an MS20426AD3 3 rivet in hole This locking rivet is held in place by the flat washer castellated nut and cotter pin If link has to be reversed then bracket and bol...

Page 496: ...MAIN GEAR Cont Aligning Main Gear Figure 3 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 10 00 Page 32 22 Reissued July 1 1993 3B15 ...

Page 497: ...ring for damage and corrosion 4 Repairs to a door may be replacement of hinge repair of fiberglass and painting INSTALLATION OF MAIN GEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY 1 Install door by positioning hinge halves of door and wing and inserting hinge pin It is recom mended a new pin be used Bend end of pin to secure in place 2 Install door retraction rod by positioning rod at its attachment points at door and strut ...

Page 498: ...MAIN GEAR Cont Reference For Main Gear Tolerances Figure 4 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 10 00 Page 32 24 Reissued July 1 1993 3B17 ...

Page 499: ...3 16 Side Brace Link 376 374 SEE NOTES 1 Bushing 375 AND 4 9 400 761 Link Stud OD 373 0 OD 373 0 004 AN26 25 Attaching Bolt 002 004 10 67025 2 Upper Side 4945 4925 Link Brace 4935 11 14843 16 Side Brace 3745 374 SEE NOTES 1 Link Bushing 3755 12 67797 04 Link Lower 4925 500 67797 05 Side Brace 4905 13 65003 44 Lower Side Brace 373 372 004 SEE NOTES 1 Link Bushing AND 4 14 402 927 Side Brace Link OD...

Page 500: ...5 0025 4370 4370 22 67026 07 Strut Bearing 313 313 002 SEE NOTES 1 31 4 31 5 AND 4 23 67012 00 Torque Link 312 001 312 002 0 0 24 67012 00 Torque Link 3760 3770 0025 3745 3745 25 31796 00 Torque Link 252 253 002 SEE NOTES 1 Bushing 251 251 AND 4 NOTES 1 LINE REAM TO THIS DIMENSION AFTER INSTALLATION OF NEW PART 2 INSTALL BEARING WITH WET ZINC CHROMATE ON ADJACENT SURFACES OF BEARING AND CASTING 3 ...

Page 501: ...GRIDS 3B20AND 3B21 PAGES 32 27 AND 32 28 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 10 00 Page 32 27 Reissued July 1 1993 3B20 ...

Page 502: ...tom of oleo housing 9 Pull piston tube with component parts from cylinder 10 Piston tube components may be removed by reaching in tube and pushing out upper bearing retainer pins Slide from tube upper bearing lower bearing with outer and inner O rings wiper strip washer and snap ring 11 To remove orifice tube remove large locknut and lock washer from top of cylinder Pull tube from cylinder 12 Orif...

Page 503: ...of cylinder allowing orifice tube to guide itself into fork tube until snap ring can be in stalled in annular slot at bottom of cylinder Install wiper strip slide washer into piston and secure assembly with snap ring 8 At top of cylinder tighten torque orifice tube locknut 9 Ascertain that bushings are installed in upper and lower torque links and then install both links Torque link bolt assemblie...

Page 504: ...NOSE GEAR Cont Nose Gear Oleo Strut Assembly Figure 5 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 20 00 Page 32 31 Reissued July 1 1993 3B24 ...

Page 505: ...NOSE GEAR Cont Nose Gear Oleo Strut Assembly Figure 5 Sheet 2 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 20 00 Page 32 32 Reissued July 1 1993 3C1 ...

Page 506: ...4 Disconnect gear tension springs from forward spring arm that is attached to right side of strut housing 5 Retract nose gear slightly to remove gear from its downlocked position 6 To remove upper and lower drag links the following procedure may be used a Disconnect rod end of hydraulic cylinder from downlock hook by removing nut and bolt that connect these two units This will require manually unl...

Page 507: ...NOSE GEAR Cont Nose Gear Installation Figure 6 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 20 00 Page 32 34 Reissued July 1 1993 3C3 ...

Page 508: ...y lead to failures 5 Check drag link through center travel by attaching upper and lower drag links and ascertaining that when stop surfaces of two links touch linkage is not less than 062 nor more than 250 of an inch through center Should distance exceed required through center travel and bolt and bushing are tight replace one or both drag links 6 Shimmy dampener requires no service other than rou...

Page 509: ...using secure and safety A washer is installed on bolt between lower drag link and arm 4 Connect gear downlock spring between downlock and upper drag link 5 Connect two gear tension springs 6 Adjust eccentric bushing used for downlock pin with gear extended and downlock engaged to obtain 001 to 010 clearance between bottom of downlock pin bearing and downlock hook Refer to Figure 7 7 Retract gear a...

Page 510: ...t of gear up stop by placing a carpenters square with longest end along bottom of fuselage and shortest end running up through centerline of wheel axle Measure up along square from bottom of fuselage 4 80 inches to determine if center of wheel axle meets this measure ment If this measurement is incorrect extend gear loosen jam nut on gear up stop and make required adjustment by turning stop 5 Adju...

Page 511: ...y loosening its attachment bolt and sliding bell crank fore and aft until it clears each steering arm rollers by 0 03 of an inch Retighten attachment bolt 4 Place airplane on jacks Refer to Jacking Chapter 7 5 Level airplane laterally and longitudinally Refer to Leveling Chapter 8 6 From center point of tail skid extend a plumb bob and mark contact point on floor 7 Extend a chalk line from mark on...

Page 512: ... by means of one rod end bearing but divide adjustment between bearings at each end of each rod Check that rod ends have sufficient thread engagement by ascertaining that a wire will not go through check hole in rod Where no check holes are provided ascertain a minimum of 3 8 inch thread engagement Reinstall rods and tighten jam nuts 14 To check nose gear steering for its 22 5 2 maximum right and ...

Page 513: ...rs to doors may be replacement of hinges and painting 6 Repairs to retraction mechanism is limited to replacement of parts and sanding and painting INSTALLATION OF NOSE GEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY Refer to Figure 11 1 Install gear doors by positioning hinge valves of door and door support assembly and inserting hinge pins It is recommended a new pin be used Bend ends of pins to secure in place 2 Assemble d...

Page 514: ...NOSE GEAR Cont Nose Gear Tolerances Figure 12 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 20 00 Page 32 41 Reissued July 1 1993 3C10 ...

Page 515: ...ng 2495 2495 7 61402 93 Upper Drag 189 193 004 Brace Bushing 191 189 8 67026 07 Draglink 313 3130 0025 SEE NOTE 1 Trunnion Bearing 314 3165 9 67026 07 Bearing 313 313 002 SEE NOTES 2 314 315 3 AND 4 10 452 366 Link Assembly 2495 2495 002 SEE NOTE 2 Bearing 2505 2515 AND 3 11 21831 04 Nose Gear Strut 247 247 003 SEE NOTE 2 Tube Bearing 248 250 12 82732 99 Nose Gear 241 241 010 Arm Bushing 246 251 1...

Page 516: ... Eccentric 189 Bushing 191 28 38068 2 Downlock 191 Bearing 189 29 67050 2 Lower Strut Assy Torque Link Fitting 30 20735 5 Torque Link 377 377 002 SEE NOTE 3 3785 3790 31 67148 00 Trunnion 4385 4385 0015 Torque Link Fitting 4370 4370 32 20735 5 Torque Link 312 312 002 31 3 314 33 44386 03 Steering 4370 0015 0015 Arm 4385 34 67054 03 Trunnion Assy 302 302 0015 Assist Spring Fitting 303 3035 35 20735...

Page 517: ...em No Part No Nomenclature Dimension Dimension Tolerance Remarks 41 38043 0 Downlock Spring 247 Attachment Fitting 248 42 38043 0 Upper Drag 6235 6230 002 Link 6245 6250 NOTES 1 INSTALL NEW BUSHING 8Y COATING O D OF BUSHING WITH LOCTITE 601 ROTATING BUSHING WHILE INSERTING IT TO INSURE COVERAG E 2 INSTALL BUSHING WITH WET ZINC CHROMATE 3 PRESS FIT 4 LINE REAM TO THIS DIMENSION AFTER INSTALLATION O...

Page 518: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 20 00 Page 32 45 Reissued July 1 1993 3C14 ...

Page 519: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 20 00 Page 32 46 Reissued July 1 1993 3C15 ...

Page 520: ...re nose gear downlock is fully disengaged before releasing nose gear drag links Damage could occur to downlock if not fully disengaged d Disconnect aft end of cylinder from its attachment fitting Remove cylinder from the wheel well 2 Disassembly of Nose Gear Actuating Cylinder Refer to Figure 13 a With cylinder removed from airplane mark position of end gland to facilitate reinstallation b Remove ...

Page 521: ...operation 5 Installation of Nose Gear Actuating Cylinder a Attach cylinder to its attachment fitting using bolt and nut b Attach operating rod end to downlock Manually unlock nose gear to provide necessary clearance from engine mount for installing attaching bolt c Connect hydraulic lines to cylinder fittings d Check adjustment of cylinder rod end Refer to Adjustment of Nose Landing Gear e Operate...

Page 522: ...ring to move out of the slot Refer to Figure 15 It may be necessary to give ring an assist to start out of slot If so insert a strong wire pick or other available tool in slot to lift up end of ring and then rotate gland e Pull piston and end gland from cylinder f Remove O rings as desired Main Gear Actuating Cylinder Figure 14 3 Cleaning Inspection and Repair of Main Gear Actuating Cylinder a Cle...

Page 523: ...o Figure 14 a Install O ring on exterior of end gland b Install O ring and back up ring in the interior of end gland c Install O ring on the body of piston assembly d Lubricate areas around O rings with hydraulic fluid park o lube or vaseline Slide end gland on piston rod Slide piston into the cylinder housing e Insert hook end of a new lock ring P N 755 997 in slot in cylinder body and slot in en...

Page 524: ...g to the upper side brace retraction fitting by using bolt washer and nut Ascertain swivel fitting is free to rotate c Connect the downlock spring to the swivel fitting d Check the adjustment of the cylinder rod end Refer to Adjustment of Main Landing Gear e Operate pump to purge system of air and check fluid level in reservoir f Remove the airplane from jacks END PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MA...

Page 525: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 30 00 Page 32 52 Reissued July 1 1993 3C21 ...

Page 526: ...heel from axle 3 Wheel halves may be separated by first deflating tire With tire sufficiently deflated remove wheel through bolts Pull wheel halves from tire by removing wheel half opposite valve stem first and then other half 4 Wheel bearing assemblies may be removed from each wheel half by first removing snap rings that secure grease seal retainers and then retainers grease seals and bearing con...

Page 527: ...s felt rings and seal retainer rings Securewith snap rings 3 Slide wheel on axle and secure with retainer nut Tighten nut to allow no side play yet allow wheelto rotate freely Safety nut with clevis pin and secure pin with washer and cotter pin MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN WHEEL Refer to Figure 17 1 Place airplane on jacks Refer to Jacking Chapter 7 2 To remove main wheel re...

Page 528: ... index mark on tire to insureproper tire tube and wheel balance Join two wheel halves and position brake disc in inner wheelhalf Install through bolts with nuts on valve stem side Torque wheel nuts to 150 inch pounds andinflate tire 2 Lubricate bearing cones and install cones grease seals and seal retainer rings Secure retainer withsnap ring 3 Slide wheel on axle and secure with retainer nut Tight...

Page 529: ...r drift pin or suitable arbor press b Installation 1 To replace a new cup apply one coat of zinc chromate primer to wheel half bearing bore 2 Insert wheel half into boiling water for 15 minutes or place in an oven not exceeding250 F 121 C for 15 minutes Chill new bearing cup in dry ice for a minimumof 15 minutes 3 Remove wheel half from source of heat and bearing cup from dry ice Install chilled b...

Page 530: ...re in cylinder fluid inlet and forcing piston from housing 6 Check anchor bolt for wear 7 Remove anchor bolt by the following procedure a Position cylinder assembly on a holding fixture Refer to Figure 18 b Use a suitable arbor press to remove anchor bolt from cylinder body 8 Install anchor bolt by the following procedure a Support anchor bolt in a holding fixture Refer to Figure 19 step a b Align...

Page 531: ...ts Minimum service thickness of Disc 164 22A used on Wheel Assembly 40 90C is 0 345 A heavy duty brake and wheel assembly is also optional Minimum disc thickness of Disc 164 46 used on heavy duty Wheel Assembly 40 120 is 0 405 A single groove or isolated grooves up to 030 of an inch deep would not necessitate replacement but a grooving of entire surface would reduce lining life and should be repla...

Page 532: ...WHEELS AND BRAKES Cont Wheel Brake Assembly Figure 20 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 40 00 Page 32 59 Reissued July 1 1993 3D4 ...

Page 533: ... and at same time generate sufficient heat to glaze surface of metallic linings Once linings are glazed they will provide many hours of maintenance free service ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF WHEEL BRAKE ASSEMBLY Refer to Figure 20 1 Lubricate piston O ring s with fluid MIL H 5606A and install on piston s Slide piston s in cylinder housing until flush with surface of housing 2 Slide lining pressure ...

Page 534: ...WHEELS AND BRAKES Cont Brake System Installation Figure 21 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 40 00 Page 32 61 Reissued July 1 1993 3D6 ...

Page 535: ...nder Draw piston rod assembly from cylinder 3 Piston rod assembly may be disassembled by first removing small snap ring securing retainer bushing spring piston seal gland and if desired large return spring 4 Remove o rings from piston and gland CLEANING INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 1 Clean cylinder parts with a suitable solvent and dry thoroughly 2 Inspect interior walls of cylin...

Page 536: ...racket and secure the base end with bolt washers nut and cotter pin This too should have washers placed on each side of the cylinder and under the nut 3 Connect rod end of cylinder to brake handle with a clevis pin and thin washers Safety clevis with a cotter pin 4 Connect pressure line to fitting at bottom of cylinder 5 Connect inlet supply line to fitting at top of cylinder and secure with sprin...

Page 537: ...WHEELS AND BRAKES Cont Toe Brake Installation Figure 23 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 40 00 Page 32 64 Reissued July 1 1993 3D9 ...

Page 538: ...WHEELS AND BRAKES Cont Brake Cylinder 17000 Toe Brake Figure 24 Brake Cylinder 10 27 Toe Brake Figure 25 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 40 00 Page 32 65 Reissued July 1 1993 3D10 ...

Page 539: ...irst remove piston rod assembly by removing retaining ring from annu lar slot in cylinder housing Draw piston rod assembly from cylinder c Piston rod assembly may be disassembled by first removing retaining ring sleeve spring and then piston assembly O ring and gland washer wiper and if desired return spring d Remove o ring from piston and packing gland CLEANING INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF BRAKE CYLI...

Page 540: ...on outside of piston b To assemble piston rod assembly install on rod in order roll pin washer spring washer packing gland with O rings seal piston assembly with O ring sleeve and retaining ring c Insert piston rod assembly in cylinder and secure with retaining ring d Install cylinder per Installation of Brake Cylinder INSTALLATION OF BRAKE CYLINDER Refer to Figure 23 1 Position cylinder at its mo...

Page 541: ...gh plastic hose at fluid reservoir and bleeder fitting on gear being bled it can be determined whether any air is left in system If air bubbles are evident filling of system shall be continued until all air is out of system and a steady flow of fluid is obtained Should brake handle remain spongy it may be necessary to disconnect bottom of toe brake cylinders next to pedal and rotating cylinder hor...

Page 542: ...rake handle until some pressure builds up in system At this time crack attaching B nuts at any of hose connections of replaced unit Most of handle sponge feeling should be displaced by this action Retighten B nuts 2 Actuate master cylinder and toe brake cylinder of side unit which was changed and bleed fluid through brake assembly on wheel by pumping pressure and cracking bleeder until pressure dr...

Page 543: ...GRIDS 3D15 THROUGH 3D17 PAGES 32 70 THROUGH 32 72 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 40 00 Page 32 70 Reissued July 1 1993 3D15 ...

Page 544: ... switch off 3 Block nose gear in up position and then slowly release emergency extension lever This will relieve hydraulic pressure and main gear will drop 4 Push gear up tight and block 5 Loosen lower attachment screw of switch bracket and rotate switch toward actuator tang until 0 06 to 0 08 measurement noted in Figure 27 is obtained Switch tang should be actuated a minimum of 0 12 inches in fro...

Page 545: ...ain that switch actuates at correct location of hook 5 Retract and extend gear hydraulically by turning master switch on raising emergency gear extension lever and moving gear selector handle to up position As gear begins to retract green light below selector should go out and red gear unsafe light at top of instrument panel PA 32R 301 SP 301T SP or GEAR WARN anunciator light PA 32R 301 II HP come...

Page 546: ...rd hook until it is heard to actuate Retighten attaching screws of switch 6 Manually move hook assembly up from pin until hook nearly disengages from pin Then with pressure against bottom of link assembly move back to ascertain that switch actuates within 025 to 035 of an inch of full lock 7 Retract and extend gear hydraulically by turning master switch on raising emergency gear extension lever an...

Page 547: ...usly when landing gear is not down and locked and throttle is reduced below 14 inches of manifold pressure REMOVAL OF LANDING GEAR UP POWER REDUCED WARNING SWITCH 1 Loosen quadrant cover by removing cover attaching screws from each side and at bottom of cover 2 Pull cover aft enough to remove screws that secure reinforcing clip to top underside of cover Remove cover 3 Remove switch from its mounti...

Page 548: ...tle lever in relation to its position next to mounting bracket 5 With airplane on ground and throttle positioned to mark loosen screws that secure switch and rotate it toward throttle until it is heard to actuate Retighten switch attachment screws 6 Advance and retard throttle to ascertain that switch actuates at desired throttle lever setting Airplane may also be flown to ascertain that horn and ...

Page 549: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 32 60 00 Page 32 78 Reissued July 1 1993 3D23 ...

Page 550: ...CHAPTER 33 LIGHTS 3D24 ...

Page 551: ... 1993 33 10 00 Annunciator Panel 3E6 July 1 1993 33 40 00 EXTERIOR 3E8 July 1 1993 33 40 00 Landing Taxi Light 3E8 July 1 1993 33 40 00 Removal and Installation of Landing Light 3E8 July 1 1993 33 40 00 Anti Collision Light Strobe 3E8 July 1 1993 33 40 00 Removal of Wing Tip Strobe Light 3E8 July 1 1993 33 40 00 Installation of Wing Tip Strobe Light 3E8 July 1 1993 33 40 00 Removal of Strobe Power...

Page 552: ...hen or if any necessary action is required TROUBLESHOOTING When checking lighting system master switch must be on in order for lights to operate Insure that circuit breaker which protects light circuit being checked is pushed ON CHART 1 Sheet 1 of 3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 33 00 00 Page 33 1 Reissued July 1 1993 3E2 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL Trou...

Page 553: ...e defective OVER BOOST warning light Press to test switch shorted to Replace switch fails to extinguish ground Circuit in manifold pressure Replace gauge gauge defective VAC warning light fails Bulb burned out Replace to operate No current to sensor Check all wire segments and connections Sensor activates at too low a Replace setting Defective sensor Replace VAC warning light fails Sensor activate...

Page 554: ... Blown fuse Replace 5 amp fuse near the to extinguish diode heat sink No current from the fuse to Check all wire segments the resistor and connections Test switch fails to activate Bad switch or connections Check wires and replace warning lights switch if necessary ALT warning light fails to Diode heat sink shorted Replace teflon insulating extinguish ammeter reads full to airframe washers Do not ...

Page 555: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 33 00 00 Page 33 4 Reissued July 1 1993 3E5 ...

Page 556: ...by illumination of an individual warning light There are three warning lights on PA 32R 301 SP models four warning lights on PA 32R 301T SP models and six to eight warning lights depending on installed options on PA 32R 301 II HP models Power is supplied from bus bar through a 5 amp fuse located behind circuit breaker panel VAC warning light is controlled by a vacuum sensor switch located at bulkh...

Page 557: ...ght on wheels 3 Flaps are extended beyond approach position 10 and landing gear is retracted Baggage door ajar and air conditioner door open annunciator lights PA 32R 301 II HP only are used when either of those options are installed The test button is used to check operation of lights when engine is running Lights will work when engine is not running with master switch turned on END PIPER AIRCRAF...

Page 558: ...to position then position clamp at bottom and secure with appropriate screw ANTI COLLISION LIGHT STROBE Lights are located at each wing tip in same assembly with navigation lights They are rated to flash approximately 50 times a minute REMOVAL OF WING TIP STROBE LIGHT 1 Remove screw securing navigation light cover and remove cover 2 Remove the three screws securing navigation light bracket assembl...

Page 559: ...LIGHTS Cont Strobe Light Connections Figure 1 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 33 40 00 Page 33 8 Reissued July 1 1993 3E9 ...

Page 560: ...at intervals of approximately 50 flashes per minute Condenser is parallel across the Xenon flash tube which is designated to hold off the 450 volts DC applied until flash tube is triggered by an external pulse This pulse is generated by a solid state timing circuit in power supply When troubleshooting strobe light system it must first be determined if trouble is in flash tube or power supply Repla...

Page 561: ...ing continuity checks can be made with an ohmmeter c Check for continuity between connectors of each interconnecting cable by checking from pin 1 to pin 1 pin 2 to pin 2 and pin 3 to pin3 When making these checks if no continuity exists cable is broken and should be replaced d Check continuity between pins 1 and 2 1 and 3 2 and 3 of interconnecting cable If continuity exists between any of these c...

Page 562: ...CHAPTER 34 NAVIGATION AND PITOT STATIC 3E12 ...

Page 563: ...93 34 20 00 Gyro Horizon 3E22 July 1 1993 34 20 00 Directional Gyro 3E23 July 1 1993 34 20 00 Magnetic Compass 3E23 July 1 1993 34 20 00 Adjustment of Compass 3E24 July 1 1993 34 20 00 Turn and Bank Indicator 3F1 July 1 1993 34 40 00 INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING 3F2 July 1 1993 34 40 00 Radar System Installation Optional 3F2 July 1 1993 34 40 00 Description 3F2 July 1 1993 34 40 00 Maximum Per...

Page 564: ...rip tion of a typical removal and installation is provided as a guide for removal and installation of instruments in those model airplanes Special care should be taken when any operation pertaining to instruments is performed 1 Remove face panel by removing screws from around perimeter of panel 2 With face panel removed mounting screws for individual instruments will be exposed Remove connections ...

Page 565: ...NAVIGATION AND PITOT STATIC Cont Pitot Static System Installation Figure 1 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 34 00 00 Page 34 2 Reissued July 1 1993 3E15 ...

Page 566: ...ID CONDITION 1 Carefully lay teflon tape on fitting threads allowing one thread to be visible from end of fitting Hold place and wrap in direction of threads so tape will remain tight when fitting is installed 2 Apply sufficient tension while winding to assure that tape forms into thread grooves one full wrap plus 1 2 inch overlap is sufficient 3 After wrap is complete maintain tension and tear ta...

Page 567: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 34 00 00 Page 34 4 Reissued July 1 1993 3E17 ...

Page 568: ...zero Aging of diaphragm Reset pointer to zero by means of setting screw Tap instrument while resetting Pointer fails to respond Obstruction in static line Disconnect all instruments connected to the static line Clear line Pitot head frozen over Water in static line Check individual instrments for obstruction in lines Obstruction in pitot head Clean lines and head Pointer oscillates Leak in static ...

Page 569: ...stment Replace instrument Excessive pointer oscillation Defective mechanism Replace instrument High or low reading Improper venting Eliminate leak in static pres sure system and check alignment of airspeed tube Setting knob is hard to turn Wrong lubrication or lack of Replace instrument lubrication Inner reference marker fails to Out of engagement Replace instrument move when setting knob is rotat...

Page 570: ... connections in static system are opened for check ing system must be rechecked per F A R 23 1325 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 34 10 00 Page 34 7 Reissued 3E20 Trouble Cause Remedy Altimeter charges reading Water in static line Remove static lines from all as aircraft is banked instruments and blow line clear from cockpit to pitot head Altimeter requires resetting Temperature ...

Page 571: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 34 10 00 Page 34 8 Reissued July 1 1993 3E21 ...

Page 572: ...01T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 34 20 00 Page 34 9 Reissued July 1 1993 3E22 Trouble Cause Remedy Bar fails to respond Insufficient vacuum Check pump and tubing Filter dirty Clean or replace filter Bar does not settle Insufficient vacuum Check line and pump Adjust valve Incorrect instrument Check part number Defective instrument Replace Bar oscillates or shimmies Instrument loose in panel Tighten mounting ...

Page 573: ...appear as gyro precession Gyro should only be checked to heading on which it was first set Due to internal friction spin axis error air turbulence and airflow gyro should be set at least every 15 minutes for accurate operation whether it has drifted or not CHART 5 TROUBLESHOOTING DIRECTIONAL GYRO INDICATOR MAGNETIC COMPASS Magnetic compass is a self contained instrument This instrument has an indi...

Page 574: ...st N S adjusting screw until one half of this error has been removed 5 Head aircraft on magnetic West and do same as Step 4 adjusting E W adjustment screw 6 Head aircraft in successive magnetic 30 headings and record compass readings on appropriate deviation card Deviations must not exceed 10 on any heading CHART 6 TROUBLESHOOTING MAGNETIC COMPASS Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTE...

Page 575: ...tor will come back to zero indicating no turn CHART 7 TROUBLESHOOTING TURN AND BANK INDICATOR PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 34 20 00 Page 34 12 Reissued July 1 1993 3F1 Trouble Cause Remedy Card does not move when The gears that turn compen Replace instrument compensating screws are sating magnets are stripped turned Compass swings erratically Normal when radio transmitter is k...

Page 576: ...mmer antenna drive magnetron mixer local oscillator and arabolic antenna For a complete system functional description of digital indicator and RTA refer to WeatherScout System Description and Installation Manual RCA P N IB8023100 available from RCA Avionics Systems 8500 Balboa Blvd Van Nuys California 91409 A source of external air acts as a safety feature to provide vapor contamination control of...

Page 577: ...INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING Cont Radar Installation Figure 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 34 40 00 Page 34 14 Reissued July 1 1993 3F3 ...

Page 578: ...INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING Cont Maximum Permissible Exposure Level MPEL Boundary Figure 3 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 34 40 00 Page 34 15 Reissued July 1 1993 3F4 ...

Page 579: ...nt tubing are accessible Disconnect air vent tubing and electrical connector and remove RTA unit from wing INSTALLATION OF RECEIVER TRANSMITTER ANTENNA 1 Place RTA unit in opening in wing Connect electrical connector and air vent tubing 2 Position RTA unit on mounting structure and secure with eight bolts AN 3 3A previously removed Ensure RTA unit has been set to correct dihedral setting level wit...

Page 580: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 34 40 00 Page 34 17 Reissued July 1 1993 3F6 ...

Page 581: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 34 40 00 Page 34 18 Reissued July 1 1993 3F7 ...

Page 582: ...CHAPTER 35 OXYGEN 3F8 ...

Page 583: ...lation of Recharge Valve 3F22 July 1 1993 35 10 00 Installation of Oxygen Cylinder 3F22 July 1 1993 35 10 00 Pressure Gauge 3F23 July 1 1993 35 10 00 Removal and Installation of Pressure Gauge 3F23 July 1 1993 35 10 00 Outlets 3F23 July 1 1993 35 10 00 Removal of Outlets 3F23 July 1 1993 35 10 00I Installation of Outlets 3F23 July 1 1993 35 10 00 Oxygen ON OFF Control 3F24 July 1 1993 35 10 00 Rem...

Page 584: ...ank feed line attached to a tee fitting on right rear passenger s outlet and from where other outlets are fed see Figure 1 Push pull control is provided by a knob on overhead panel to left of fresh air duct control A gauge for displaying tank pressure is mounted in overhead duct behind passengers and is lighted by a post light Portable oxygen system is made up of two Scott units each involving a 2...

Page 585: ...ge and check system for leaks Pressure gauge or regulator Return unit to manufacturer defective or take to approved shop 2 Replace gauge 1 Pressure indication normal Oxygen cylinder regulator Return unit to manufacturer but no oxygen flowing assembly defective or take to approved shop 2 Remove tank and have regulator removed 1 Offensive odors in oxygen Cylinder pressure below 50 psi Purge the oxyg...

Page 586: ...o not use thread lubricants of any kind Teflon tape 3M No 48 should be used on TAPERED pipe threads without tape extending beyond first thread refer to affective information in this chapter CAUTION Before working with system make sure aircraft is electrically grounded and your hands and clothes are free of oil grease and dirt FIXED OXYGEN SYSTEM INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Due to nature of process ...

Page 587: ...ars whichever comes first Month and year of last test should be stamped on cylinder beneath ICC DOT identification 1 Check outlets for leakage both in use and non use condition and for leakage around an inserted con nector For leak testing information refer to appropriate subject in this chapter 2 Check high pressure gauge for accuracy by comparing its indicated pressure with that of a gauge of kn...

Page 588: ...Aviation 8570 00 plug in Use same hose dimensions as explained in last step Connect low apparatus to co pilot s outlet c Insert a Scott plug in in each of other outlets and pull oxygen control knob to on position Pressure and low should be 55 to 80 psi and 3 3 to 5 3 1 pm respectively at sea level d There should be no external leakage anywhere on regulator when it is turned off and all fittings le...

Page 589: ...with cable ties at location specific item crosses or is near oxygen tube s If an item is near oxygen tube for a certain distance oxygen tube for that distance must be covered d A minimum of 1 8 inch between tubing and structure adjoining supporting clamp as shown in Figure 3 sketch A e Where a tube passes through a grommet tube must not bear on grommet in any way that might cause cutting of gromme...

Page 590: ...CREW PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEMS Cont Oxygen Tubing Installations Figure 3 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 35 10 00 Page 35 7 Reissued July 1 1993 3F16 ...

Page 591: ...CREW PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEMS Cont Installation of Swaglock Fittings Figure 4 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 35 10 00 Page 35 8 Reissued July 1 1993 3F17 ...

Page 592: ...n be reused provided they do not become badly con taminated with oil This condition can be determined by thor oughly evaporating 100 millileters of the liquid in a glass dish of a determined weight Evaporation may be accomplished by heating dish at 200 F for one half hour If after evaporation and cool down residue exceeds 100 milligrams in weight sol vent cannot be used for this purpose 3 Method I...

Page 593: ... insert tube until it firmly bottoms on shoulder in tool Preswaging tool can be attained from Crawford Fitting Company refer to List of Consumable Materials in Chapter 91 b Tighten nut on fitting just enough that tube within fitting will not turn by hand c With a wrench tighten nut as follows 1 On tubing with diameters over 3 16 inch tighten 1 1 4 turns 2 On tubing with 1 16 1 8 or 3 16 inch diame...

Page 594: ... cylinder for 100 psi and check for leakage at outlets 6 Correct any leaks and wipe off excess leak detector solution 7 Close valve on nitrogen gas tank and insert a Scott plug in to relieve system pressure 8 Disconnect test gauge plug in and nitrogen tank 9 If oxygen cylinder is not to be hooked up or installed immediately cap and cover exposed fittings with new clean plastic bags Temporarily sup...

Page 595: ...oard REMOVAL OF OXYGEN CYLINDER Refer to Figure 1 1 Remove screws attaching finished bulkhead to fuselage bulkhead and remove finished bulkhead 2 It is recommended that when working in rear of aircraft appropriate tailstand be properly attached to tail 3 With immediate area clear of flammables grease hydraulic fluid fuel and oxygen system off connect a mask or tube to an outlet to exhaust any pres...

Page 596: ... Apply teflon tape to male threads as explained earlier in this section 4 Reconnect high pressure line to valve and torque fitting 30 to 50 inch pounds 5 Reinstall valve protective shroud INSTALLATION OF OXYGEN CYLINDER 1 Before mounting cylinder to shelf connect control cable to control valve regulator If shelf has been removed reinstall it before continuing Install teflon taper per prior instruc...

Page 597: ... Install gauge as follows a With fitting installed on rear of instrument install gauge in bracket Make sure clip is properly secure b Remove cap from oxygen line and with teflon tape properly installed connect oxygen line to fitting c Reinstall fitting in tank OUTLETS REMOVAL OF OUTLETS 1 Make sure oxygen system is completely turned off Insert an oxygen mask to release pressure and insure the syst...

Page 598: ...rol mechanism REFILLING OXYGEN SYSTEM CAUTION Before servicing oxygen system make sure aircraft is securely grounded electrically Do not attempt to tighten any connections while system is charged Do not operate one electrical equipment while servicing oxygen system Refilling of oxygen systems should be done by qualified personnel For comparison of filling pressures to ambient temperatures refer to...

Page 599: ... storage cylinder that has a pressure higher than the aircraft s cylinder but lower than others 2 Open valve on only one storage cylinder with lowest pressure When pressure indicated on aircraft s oxygen gauge and charging gauge has become equal close valve of storage cylinder then go to storage cylinder with next higher pressure and repeat procedure 3 If after using last storage cylinder aircraft...

Page 600: ...eriod Light weight cylinders ICC or DOT 3HT1850 must be tested every 3 years and after 4380 refills or 15 years whichev er comes first be replaced Month and year of last test stamped on cylinder beneath ICC DOT identification 1 Inspect outlets and using directions described in next paragraph check leaks both in non use and use condition 2 Check pressure gauge for accuracy by removing back section ...

Page 601: ...further tests can be made Rate of any leak should not exceed one percent of total supply per 24 hour period All traces of detector fluid should be wiped off at conclusion of examination MAINTENANCE 1 Check cylinder to be sure it is securely mounted 2 Check cylinder for ICC identification number and for date of last FAA inspection and test 3 If cylinder is completely empty it must be completely dis...

Page 602: ...ors and windows open 2 Connect oxygen recharging unit to filler valve 3 Plug oxygen masks in to outlet valves and turn on system 4 Set recharging unit pressure regulator to deliver 50 psi and let system purge for one hour If any odor is still present repeat the procedure for one or more hours If the odor persists after the second purging send unit to its manufacturer or an approved shop CLEANING O...

Page 603: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 35 10 00 Page 35 20 Reissued July 1 1993 3G5 ...

Page 604: ...CHAPTER 37 VACUUM 3G6 ...

Page 605: ...10 00 Replacing Pump Fittings 3G14 July 1 1993 37 10 00 Installation of Vacuum Pump 3G14 July 1 1993 37 10 00 Vacuum Regulator Valve 3G15 July 1 1993 37 10 00 Adjustment of Vacuum Regulator Valve 3G15 July 1 1993 37 10 00 Removal and Replacement of Regulator Valve 3G15 July 1 1993 37 20 00 INDICATING 3G16 July 1 1993 37 20 00 Vacuum Gauge 3G16 July 1 1993 37 20 00 Vacuum Sensor 3G16 July 1 1993 37...

Page 606: ...bers 32R 8529018 through 32R 86290006 and 3229001 through 3229003 PA 32 301 II HP models serial numbers 3213042 and up will have an auxiliary dry air pump system in the existing system A vacu um gauge is used to monitor the system constantly TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 1 TROUBLESHOOTING VACUUM SYSTEM Sheet 1 of 3 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 37 00 00 Page 37 1 Reissued July 1 1993 3...

Page 607: ...uum regulator sticking or Clean screen and check dirty screen regulator operation Regulator cannot be adjusted Lines leaking Check all lines and fittings to maintain correct pressure Vacuum pump malfunctioning Replace pump Vacuum correct on ground but Vacuum pump malfunctioning Replace pump will not maintain pressure at altitude Regulator sticky Clean regulator Vacuum correct but pilot Regulator s...

Page 608: ...res for open breaks and repair as needed AUX ON selected on ground Leak in vacuum system Tighten clamps and check check and or no vacuum hoses Replace if necessary is indicated AUX ON annunciator will Restriction in hose lines Inspect repair or replace not light hose line if necessary Dirty filter Replace filter Regulator not adjusted properly Adjust properly VAC OFF AUX ON Open circuit breaker Pu...

Page 609: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 37 00 00 Page 37 4 Reissued July 1 1993 3G11 ...

Page 610: ... this caution is to protect pump from ingesting any foreign materials that could cause premature service 2 Vacuum Gauges a Vacuum gauges seldom require service and usually are replaced when malfunctions occur NOTE Vacuum gauge failure in a properly operating vacuum system does not impair safety of flight b If vacuum gauge malfunctions in a manner to cause an incorrect reading in normal cruise cond...

Page 611: ...gauge reading when panel gauge is not suspect or has been checked against a known test gauge cruise RPM only b All modes of regulator malfunction tend to increase vacuum power applied to gyros Thus although excess vacuum is applied a loss of vacuum does not occur c Gyros themselves act as a limiting device to keep vacuum power applied from exceeding safe levels NOTE If panel gauge has been checked...

Page 612: ...icant and AIRBORNE fittings are cadmium plated thus eliminating any need for thread lubricants If thread lubricant is required use a powdered moly sulfide or graphite in dry form or in an evaporating vehicle or employ a silicone spray Apply sparingly to external threads of fittings only CAUTION DO NOT use pipe tape thread dope hydrocarbon oil or grease as these can contaminate pump and cause malfu...

Page 613: ...inches of mercury If vacuum reading fails to fall within this range shut down engine and adjust regulator valve by moving valve adjustment screw clockwise to increase pressure and counterclockwise to decrease pressure Start engine and repeat check With engine running at 2000 rpm suction gauge should indicate 5 0 inches of mercury 0 2 inches of mercury 4 Restart engine and repeat check 5 After syst...

Page 614: ...uge will show a decrease in pressure Do not reset regulator until filter and lines have been checked VACUUM SENSOR Access to vacuum sensor unit is gained by reaching up under instrument panel to vacuum regulator REMOVAL OF VACUUM SENSOR 1 Disconnect the two electrical leads 2 Unscrew sensor unit from vacuum regulator 3 Cover hole to prevent foreign matter from entering regulator INSTALLATION OF VA...

Page 615: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 37 20 00 Page 37 10 Reissued July 1 1993 3G17 ...

Page 616: ...CHAPTER 39 3G18 ELECTRIC ELECTRONIC PANELS MULTIPURPOSE PARTS ...

Page 617: ...rams schematics 39 40 00 MULTIPURPOSE ELECTRICAL PARTS 3G20 July 1 1993 39 40 00 Electrical Switches and Circuit Breakers 3G20 July 1 1993 39 40 00 Removal of Electrical Switches PA32R 301 301T SP 3G20 July 1 1993 39 40 00 Removal of Electrical Switches PA32R 301 II HP 3G20 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 39 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 3G19 ...

Page 618: ...behind instrument panel remove switch and disconnect electrical connections NOTE Make note of the placement of the electrical leads to facilitate installation REMOVAL OF ELECTRICAL SWITCHES PA 32R 301 II HP NOTE The PA 32R 301 II HP uses lighted rocker switches which snap in from the front of the instrument panel No screws are required 1 Gain access to switch to be replaced from behind instrument ...

Page 619: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 39 40 00 Page 39 2 Reissued July 1 1993 3G21 ...

Page 620: ...CHAPTER 51 STRUCTURES 3G22 ...

Page 621: ...atch Repairs 3H3 July 1 1993 51 00 00 Thermoplastic Repairs 3H5 July 1 1993 51 00 00 Safety Walk Repair 3H12 July 1 1993 51 00 00 Surface Preparation 3H12 July 1 1993 51 00 00 Product Listing for Liquid Safety Walk Compound 3H12 July 1 1993 51 00 00 Application of Liquid Safety Walk Compound 3H12 July 1 1993 51 00 00 Surface Preparation for Pressure Sensitive Safety Walk 3H13 July 1 1993 51 00 00 ...

Page 622: ...of minor dents and or materials used for filling inside of surfaces is also prohibited on all movable tail surfaces Never make a skin replacement or patch plate from material other than type of original skin or of a different thickness than original skin Repair must be as strong as original skin However flexibility must be retained so surrounding areas will not receive extra stress FIBERGLASS REPA...

Page 623: ...STRUCTURAL REPAIRS Cont Skin Materials and Thickness Figure 1 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 51 00 00 Page 51 2 Reissued July 1 1993 3H1 ...

Page 624: ...STRUCTURAL REPAIRS Cont Skin Materials and Thickness Figure 1 Sheet 2 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 51 00 00 Page 51 3 Reissued July 1 1993 3H2 ...

Page 625: ...elow structure surface as it cures If wax paper is used ascertain wax is removed from surface 7 Rough up bottom and edges of hole with electric burr attachment or rough sandpaper Feather hole into surrounding gel coat do not undercut 8 Pour out a small amount of resin add catalyst and mix thoroughly using a cutting motion rather than stirring Use no fibers 9 Using tip of putty knife or fingertips ...

Page 626: ...a 11 Mask area around hole with tape and paper to protect surface Cut a piece of fiberglas mat about one inch larger than hole and one or more pieces of fiberglas cloth two inches larger than hole Brush catalyst resin over hole lay mat over hole and wet out with catalyzed resin Use a daubing action with brush Then apply additional layer or layers of fiberglas cloth to build up patch to surface of ...

Page 627: ...rally insure a good bond betweenn epoxy compounds and thermoplastic PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 51 00 00 Page 51 6 Reissued July 1 1993 3H5 ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS SUPPLIERS Buffing and Rubbing Automotive Type DuPone DuPont Company Compounds 7 Wilmington DE 1998 Ram Chemical 69 x 1 Ram Chemicals Gardena CA 90248 Mirror Glaze 1 Mirror Bright Polish Co Inc Irvin CA 92713 Cleaners Fa...

Page 628: ...ry cement by dissolving thermoplastic material of the same type being repaired in solvent until desired paste like consistency is achieved b This mixture is then applied to damaged area Upon solvent evaporation hard durable solids remaining can easily be shaped to desired contour by filing or sanding c Solvent adhesives are not recommended for highly stressed areas on thin walled parts or for patc...

Page 629: ...ess is apparent or thin walled sections are used welding method is suggested j Welding method requires a hot air gun and ABS rods To weld gun should be held to direct flow of hot air into fusion repair zone heating damaged area and rod simultaneously Gun should be moved continuously in a fanning motion to prevent discoloration of material Pressure must be maintained on rod to insure good adhesion ...

Page 630: ...THERMOPLASTIC REPAIRS Cont Welding Repair Method Figure 5 Repairing of Cracks Figure 6 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 51 00 00 Page 51 9 Reissued July 1 1993 3H8 ...

Page 631: ...THERMOPLASTIC REPAIRS Cont Various Repairs Figure 7 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 51 00 00 Page 51 10 Reissued July 1 1993 3H9 ...

Page 632: ...ng compound is used repair should be made in layers not exceeding a 1 2 inch in thickness at a time thus allowing compound to cure and insuring a good solid buildup of successive layers as required 6 Stress Lines Refer to figure 8 a Stress lines produce a whitened appearance in a localized area and generally emanate from severe bending or impacting of material Refer to figure 9 b To restore materi...

Page 633: ...THERMOPLASTIC REPAIRS Cont Repair of Stress Lines Figure 8 Repair of Impacted Damage Figure 9 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 51 00 00 Page 51 12 Reissued July 1 1993 3H11 ...

Page 634: ...FETY WALK COMPOUND Liquid safety walk compound shall be applied in an area free of moisture for a period of 24 hours mini mum after application Do not apply when surface to be coated is below 50 F Apply liquid safety walk compound as follows 1 Mix and thin liquid safety walk compound in accordance with manufacturer s instructions on container 2 Coat specified surfaces with a smooth unbroken film o...

Page 635: ...imum prior to application of safety walk APPLICATION OF PRESSURE SENSITIVE SAFETY WALK Wipe area with a clean dry cloth to insure that no moisture remains on surface Do not apply when surface temperature is below 50F Apply pressure sensitive safety walk as follows 1 Peel back full width of protective liner approximately 2 inches from leading edge of safety walk 2 Apply safety walk to wing area beg...

Page 636: ...CHAPTER 52 DOORS 3H14 ...

Page 637: ...mbly 3H19 July 1 1993 52 10 00 Door Safety Latch 3H19 July 1 1993 52 10 00 Removal of Door Safety Latch 3H19 July 1 1993 52 10 00 Installation of Door Safety Latch 3H19 July 1 1993 52 10 00 Adjustment of Door Safety Latch 3H19 July 1 1993 52 10 00 Replacement of Door Snubber Seal 3H19 July 1 1993 52 30 00 CARGO 2I2 July 1 1993 52 30 00 Baggage Door 2I2 July 1 1993 52 30 00 Removal of Baggage Door ...

Page 638: ...er compartment door on left side of fuselage aft of wing trailing edge A rear baggage compartment door adjoins passenger compartment door Forward baggage compartment door is located on right side of fuselage at station 41 1 END PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 00 00 Page 52 1 Reissued July 1 1993 3H16 ...

Page 639: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 00 00 Page 52 2 Reissued July 1 1993 3H17 ...

Page 640: ...on that will provide proper door fit 3 To ensure long life of door seals and improve sealing characteristics it is recommended they be lubricated with a fluorocarbon or similar dry lubricant in a spray can DOOR LATCH MECHANISM REMOVAL OF DOOR LATCH MECHANISM 1 Remove door latch mechanism by removing door trim upholstery and screws that attach latch plate and latch mechanism to door 2 Disconnect la...

Page 641: ...tain that it is free of rubbing on trim panels ADJUSTMENT OF DOOR SAFETY LATCH 1 To adjust door safety latch remove two screws from latch plate found at top of door opening 2 Remove plate and turn loop assembly in or out to make necessary adjustments 3 Replace latch plate and secure with two attachment screws REPLACEMENT OF DOOR SNUBBER SEALS Door snubber seals have been incorporated in door jambs...

Page 642: ...rotruding leg facing outboard beginning at lower center of door jamb and work progressively around jamb applying pressure to snubber to remove any trapped air and to ensure a proper bond Do Not prestretch snubber as this can induce cracks NOTE Normal tack time for 3M EC 1300L is 30 45 minutes at 75 F However adhesive that has set may be reactivated by a clean rag moistened with Toluol or MEK f It ...

Page 643: ...REPLACEMENT OF DOOR SNUBBER SEALS Cont Snubber Installation Sheet 1 of 3 Figure 1 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 10 00 Page 52 6 Reissued July 1 1993 3H21 ...

Page 644: ...REPLACEMENT OF DOOR SNUBBER SEALS Cont Snubber Installation Sheet 2 of 3 Figure 1 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 10 00 Page 52 7 Reissued July 1 1993 3H22 ...

Page 645: ...REPLACEMENT OF DOOR SNUBBER SEALS Cont Snubber Installation Sheet 3 of 3 Figure 1 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 10 00 Page 52 8 Reissued July 1 1993 3H23 ...

Page 646: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 10 00 Page 52 9 Reissued July 1 1993 3H24 ...

Page 647: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 10 00 Page 52 10 Reissued July 1 1993 3I1 ...

Page 648: ...ly through front of door INSTALLATION OF BAGGAGE DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY 1 Place lock into position for installation 2 Install nut on lock assembly and tighten with use of a special wrench BAGGAGE DOOR HINGE REMOVAL OF BAGGAGE DOOR HINGE 1 Remove door from airplane as described in Removal of Baggage Door 2 Remove hinge half from airplane or door by drilling out rivets and removing hinge INSTALLATION OF...

Page 649: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 30 00 Page 52 12 Reissued July 1 1993 3I3 ...

Page 650: ...CHAPTER 55 STABILIZERS 3I4 ...

Page 651: ...00 Balancing 3I9 July 1 1993 55 10 00 Balancing Equipment 3I9 July 1 1993 55 10 00 Balancing Stabilator 3I9 July 1 1993 55 30 00 VERTICAL STABILIZER 3I12 July 1 1993 55 30 00 Removal and Installation of Vertical Fin 3I12 July 1 1993 55 40 00 RUDDER 3I14 July 1 1993 55 40 00 Removal and Replacement of Rudder 3I14 July 1 1993 55 40 00 Balancing Rudder 3I15 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T ...

Page 652: ...ertain amount of free play in stabilator trim tab and aileron 1 Stabilator Check the stabilator for any free play at its attachment points by grasping each half near the tip and gently trying to move it up and down fore and aft and in and out No play is allowed 2 Stabilator Trim Tab Set the stabilator trim tab in neutral position This neutral position is determined with the airplane properly rigge...

Page 653: ...STABILATOR Cont Empennage Group Figure 1 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 10 00 Page 55 2 Reissued July 1 1993 3I7 ...

Page 654: ...STABILATOR Cont Empennage Group Figure 1 Sheet 2 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 10 00 Page 55 3 Reissued July 1 1993 3I8 ...

Page 655: ...ght WARNING All control surfaces that have been replaced repainted or repaired must be rebalanced according to the procedures in this manual BALANCING STABILATOR Refer to Figure 2 To balance stabilator assembly must be complete including trim tab tab pushrod and end bearing stabilator tips and all attaching screws Before balancing tape trim tab in neutral position with a small piece of tape Place ...

Page 656: ...STABILATOR Cont BALANCING Cont Stabilator Balancing Figure 2 END PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 10 00 Page 55 5 Reissued July 1 1993 3I10 ...

Page 657: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 52 10 00 Page 55 6 Reissued July 1 1993 3I11 ...

Page 658: ...ge of fin 6 Remove the two bolts which secure trim mechanism to fin spar Remove the four bolts which secure fin spar to aft bulkhead Remove fin 7 Install fin in reverse of removal instruction using Figure 1 as reference for proper hardware and torques Check all bolts for safety NOTE Modifications to fuselage are permissable if they do not involve alterations to primary structure It is recommended ...

Page 659: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 55 30 00 Page 55 8 Reissued July 1 1993 3I13 ...

Page 660: ...e remaining hinge bolt Disconnect tail light electrical wire and remove rudder 5 Install rudder in reverse of removal check all bolts and pins for safety WARNING All control surfaces that have been replaced repainted or repaired must be rebalanced according to the procedures in this manual Rudder Balancing Figure 3 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 55 40 00 Page 55 9 Reissued July ...

Page 661: ...red by adjustment of moveable weight and determine static balance limit If static balance is not within limits given proceed as follows 1 Nose Heavy This condition is highly improbable recheck calculations and measurements 2 Nose Light In this case the mass balance weight is too light or the rudder is too heavy because of painting it will be necessary to strip the paint and repaint If the rudder i...

Page 662: ...CHAPTER 56 WINDOWS 3I16 ...

Page 663: ...3 56 10 00 Removal of Windshield 3I18 July 1 1993 56 10 00 Installation of Windshield 3I18 July 1 1993 56 20 00 CABIN 3I20 July 1 1993 56 20 00 Side Windows 3I20 July 1 1993 56 20 00 Removal of Side Windows 3I20 July 1 1993 56 20 00 Installation of Side Windows 3I20 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 56 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 3I17 ...

Page 664: ...y black vinyl tape around outer edges of entire windshield 3 Apply PMS K0003 Type II vinyl foam tape number 560 or equivalent over plastic tape completely around edges of windshield 4 Apply PRC PR307 sealant or equivalent under edge of moldings and trim strips 5 Place windshield in position for installation and slide windshield aft and up into place using caution not to dislocate tape around edges...

Page 665: ...FLIGHT COMPARTMENT Cont Typical Windshield Installation Figure 1 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 56 10 00 Page 56 2 Reissued July 1 1993 3I19 ...

Page 666: ...he same dimension as the window removed b Apply PMS K0003 Type II vinyl foam tape or equivalent on both side of the window around the outer edges c Apply PRC PR 307 Sealant or equivalent completely around the outer surface of the windows at all attachment flanges d Insert the window in the frame and install the retainer moldings e Secure the molding with attachment screws and tighten until the vin...

Page 667: ...CABIN Cont INSTALLATION OF SIDE WINDOWS Cont Typical Single Pane Side Window Installation Figure 2 END PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 56 20 00 Page 56 4 Reissued July 1 1993 3I21 ...

Page 668: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 56 20 00 Page 56 5 Reissued July 1 1993 3I22 ...

Page 669: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 56 20 00 Page 56 6 Reissued July 1 1993 3I23 ...

Page 670: ...CHAPTER 57 WINGS 3I24 ...

Page 671: ...00 Wing to Fuselage Attach Fittings 3J6 July 1 1993 57 40 00 Removal of Wing 3J6 July 1 1993 57 40 00 Installation of Wing 3J9 July 1 1993 57 50 00 FLIGHT SURFACES 3J12 July 1 1993 57 50 00 Ailreon 3J12 July 1 1993 57 50 00 Removal of Aileron 3J14 July 1 1993 57 50 00 Installation of Aileron 3J14 July 1 1993 57 50 00 Checking Aileron Free Play 3J14 July 1 1993 57 50 00 Balancing Aileron 3J14 July ...

Page 672: ...of the fuselage by inserting the butt ends of the main spars into a spar box carry through The spar box is an integral part of the fuselage structure which provides in effect a continuous main spar with splices at each side of the fuselage There are also fore and aft attachments at the front and rear spars NOTE The major subassemblies of the wing may be removed individually or the wing may be remo...

Page 673: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 57 00 00 Page 57 2 Reissued July 1 1993 3J3 ...

Page 674: ...TALLATION OF WING TIP 1 Place the wing tip in a position that the navigation and strobe light leads may be connected Connect the ground lead to the wing rib by use of a screw and nut and the positive lead to the position light by connecting the wire terminals of screwing the connectors together Insulate the wire terminals and be certain that the ground lead is free of dirt and film to insure a goo...

Page 675: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 57 20 00 Page 57 4 Reissued July 1 1993 3J5 ...

Page 676: ...pass between the pulley and bracket 9 Disconnect the flap from the torque tube by extending the flap to its fullest degree and removing the bolt and bushing from the bearing at the aft end of the control rod 10 Disconnect the fuel line at the fitting located forward of the spar at the wing butt line CAUTION To prevent damage or contamination of fuel hydraulic and miscellaneous lines place a protec...

Page 677: ...464P6LA14 H19300 6 AN960 616 K19301 6 B5 NAS464P6LA14 H19300 6 AN960 616 K19301 6 C1 NAS464P5LA20 MS21042 5 AN960 516L AN960 516 2 Max C2 NAS464P6LA20 MS21042 6 AN960 616L AN960 616 2 Max C3 NAS464P6LA20 MS21042 6 AN960 616L AN960 616 2 Max C4 NAS464P6LA20 MS21042 6 AN960 616L AN960 616 2 Max C5 NAS464P6LA21 MS21042 6 AN960 616L 96352 3 C6 NAS464P5LA21 MS21042 5 AN960 516L 96352 2 D1 NAS464P5LA20 ...

Page 678: ...ATTACH FITTINGS Cont Wing Installation Figure 1 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 57 40 00 Page 57 7 Reissued July 1 1993 3J8 ...

Page 679: ...d be torqued in accordance with the chart of recommended torque requirements given in Chapter 91 Torque the rear spar attachment bolt as specified in Figure 1 9 Install the wing jacks and the tail support to the tail skid with approximately 250 pounds of ballast on the base of the tail support Remove the fuselage cradle and wing supports 10 If the left wing was removed it is necessary that the pit...

Page 680: ...uel System Chapter 12 Open the fuel valve and check for leaks and flow 19 Check the operation of all electrical equipment and pitot system 20 Remove the airplane from the jacks 21 Install the cockpit trim panel assembly spar box carpet the front and back seats and wing butt rubber molding 22 Replace all the access plates and panels on the wing involved board to insure maximum end play of 0 035 is ...

Page 681: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 57 40 00 Page 57 10 Reissued July 1 1993 3J11 ...

Page 682: ...FLIGHT SURFACES AILERON Aileron and Flap Installation Figure 2 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 57 50 00 Page 57 11 Reissued July 1 1993 3J12 ...

Page 683: ...FLIGHT SURFACES Cont AILERON Cont Aileron and Flap Installation cont Figure 2 Sheet 2 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 57 50 00 Page 57 12 Reissued July 1 1993 3J13 ...

Page 684: ...ay on the straightedge The overall travel free play must not exceed 0 24 of an inch Should free play exceed the limit stated make necessary repairs as required to eliminate free play Grasp the aileron and move it spanwise inboard out board to insure maximum end play of 0 035 of an inch is not exceeded BALANCING AILERON Refer to Figure 3 WARNING All control surfaces that have been replaced repainte...

Page 685: ...straight back off the wing INSTALLATION OF WING FLAP Refer to Figure 2 1 Replace the wing flap by placing the flap onto its proper position and inserting the hinge bolts bush ings washers and nuts 2 With the flap control in the full flap position place the bushing on the outboard side of the rod end bearing and insert and tighten the bolt 3 Operate the flap several times to be certain it is operat...

Page 686: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 57 50 00 Page 57 15 Reissued July 1 1993 3J16 ...

Page 687: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 57 50 00 Page 57 16 Reissued July 1 1993 3J17 ...

Page 688: ...CHAPTER 61 PROPELLER 3J18 ...

Page 689: ... and Repair of Propeller 3K1 July 1 1993 61 10 00 Installing Propeller PA 32R 301 SP 3K2 July 1 1993 61 10 00 Installing Propeller PA 32R 301 II HP 3K2 July 1 1993 61 10 00 Installing Propeller PA 32R 301T 3K3 July 1 1993 61 10 00 Blade Track 3K4 July 1 1993 61 20 00 CONTROLLING 3K6 July 1 1993 61 20 00 Propeller Governor 3K6 July 1 1993 61 20 00 Removal of Propeller Governor 3K6 July 1 1993 61 20...

Page 690: ...d magneto switches are off 2 Move fuel selector to off position 3 Place the mixture control in idle cut off 4 Note position of each component to facilitate reinstallation 5 Remove the screws from around the spinner assembly and remove spinner 6 Remove the safety wire from the six propeller mounting nuts on studs and remove studs 7 Place a drip pan under the propeller to catch oil spillage then rem...

Page 691: ...PROPELLER ASSEMBLY Cont Propeller Installation PA 32R 301 SP Figure 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 61 10 00 Page 61 2 Reissued July 1 1993 3J21 ...

Page 692: ...LACES AND SAFETY WRAP HUB CYLINDER WITH 289 788 TEFLON TAPE AS REQUIRED UP TO FOUR LAYERS FOR SNUG FIT OF REINFORCING RING SPINNER ATTACHMENTBOLTS TORQUE 20 TO 24 IN LBS 4 PLACES NOTE 1 NOTE 2 NOTES 1 LOCATION OF BOLT HOLE MARKED 0 WHEN 1 PISTON IS ON TOP DEAD CENTER 2 BUSHINGS ARE AS INDICATED 3 INSTALL PROPELLER WITH BLADES INDEXED WITH BOLT HOLES AS SHOWN PROPELLER ASSEMBLY SPINNER ASSEMBLY ...

Page 693: ...PROPELLER ASSEMBLY Cont Propeller Installation PA 32R 301T SP Figure 4 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 61 10 00 Page 61 4 Reissued July 1 1993 3J23 ...

Page 694: ...ller Torque Description Required Torque Limits Dry Propeller Mounting Nuts 60 70 foot pounds Fwd Bulkhead Attachment Bolts 30 35 inch pounds 2 Spinner Attachment Screws 20 25 inch pounds 1 Measurement taken at 30 inch radius 2 2 blade installation only 3 BLADE Hub Model HC I3YR 1RF Blade Model F7663DR Diameter 77 in minimum 78 in maximum Blade Angle Low Pitch High RPM 12 4 0 2 1 High Pitch Low RPM...

Page 695: ...o that each blade can be checked individually If blades are tight the propeller should be disassembled 7 Inspect blades for damage or cracks Nicks in leading edges of blades should be filed out and all edges rounded as cracks sometimes start from such places Use fine emery cloth for finishing Refer to Figure 1 for propeller blade care PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 61 10 00 Page...

Page 696: ...pinner bulkhead and torque bolts per Chart 1 Safety bolts with MS20995C41 safety wire 15 Install spinner and spinner cuff Torque all attachment screws per Chart 1 INSTALLING PROPELLER PA 32R 301 II HP Refer to Figure 3 1 Insure master and magneto switches are off 2 Place fuel selector to off position 3 Place mixture control in idle cut off 4 Observe the starter ring gear to make sure it is mounted...

Page 697: ...E EC776 adhesive coating can be purchased through the Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company St Paul Minnesota NOTE Propeller hub must be clean dry and free from oil or grease 9 Install propeller hub chafing ring within ten minutes of application of coating 10 Install and secure clamps around chafing ring Refer to Figure 4 Sketch A for proper installation 11 Slide propeller carefully over pilo...

Page 698: ...ng small marks with a pencil at each position Then center the tip between these marks and scribe a line on the board for the full width of the tip 2 Carefully rotate propeller by hand to bring the opposite or next blade down Center the tip and scribe a pencil line as before and check that lines are not separated more than 0625 inch 3 Propellers having excess blade track should be removed and inspe...

Page 699: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 61 10 00 Page 61 10 Reissued July 1 1993 3K5 ...

Page 700: ...ol cable end to the governor control arm The ball stud is installed in the inner hole of the control arm 6 Adjust governor control per Rigging and Adjustment of Propeller Governor 7 Install engine cowl RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF PROPELLER GOVERNOR Refer to Figure 5 1 Prior to adjusting the propeller governor high rpm setting the control linkage should be thoroughly checked for correct function NOTE...

Page 701: ...er engine cowl and repeat step b to ascertain proper rpm setting d After setting the proper high rpm adjustment run the self locking nut on the fine adjustment screw against the base projection to lock e Ascertain that the governor control arm is adjusted to the proper angle on the control wheel as shown in Figure 5 5 With the high rpm adjustment complete the control system should be adjusted so t...

Page 702: ...INTENTIONALY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 61 20 00 Page 61 13 Reissued July 1 1993 3K8 ...

Page 703: ...INTENTIONALY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 61 20 00 Page 61 14 Reissued July 1 1993 3K9 ...

Page 704: ...CHAPTER 70 STANDARD PRACTICES ENGINES 3K10 ...

Page 705: ... ENGINE TABLE OF CONTENTS EFFECTIVITY CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY 70 00 00 STANDARD PRACTICES ENGINE 3K12 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 70 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 3K11 ...

Page 706: ...ckwire lockwashers tablocks tabwashers or cotter pins All lockwire and cotter pins must fit snugly in holes drilled in studs and bolts for locking purposes Cotter pins should be installed so the head fits into the castellation of the nut and unless otherwise specified bend one end of the pin back over the stud or bolt and the other end down flat against the nut Use only corrosion resistant steel l...

Page 707: ...INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 70 00 00 Page 70 2 Reissued July 1 1993 3K13 ...

Page 708: ...CHAPTER 71 POWER PLANT 3K14 ...

Page 709: ... 71 00 00 Installation of Engine PA 32R 301T 3L4 July 1 1993 71 10 00 COWLING 3L6 July 1 1993 71 10 00 Cowling Maintenance 3L6 July 1 1993 71 10 00 Removal of Cowling PA 32R 301 SP 3L6 July 1 1993 71 10 00 Installation of Cowling PA 32R 301 SP 3L6 July 1 1993 71 10 00 Removal of Cowling PA 32R 301 II HP 3L6 July 1 1993 71 10 00 Installation of Cowling PA 32R 301 II HP 3L6 July 1 1993 71 10 00 Remo...

Page 710: ...ing oil jets for internal piston cooling The engine is furnished with a starter 60 amperes 12 volt alternator volt age regulator shielded ignition system vacuum pump drive fuel injector and a dry paper type induction filter In the event of air stoppage through the filter an alternate air source can be opened when selected manually by the use of a lever in the cockpit An automatic alternate air doo...

Page 711: ...dle cut off Incorrect throttle setting Open throttle to one eighth of its range Defective spark plugs Clean and adjust or replace spark plugs Defective ignition wire Check with electric tester and replace defective wires Defective battery Replace with charged battery Improper operation of Clean points Check internal magneto breaker timing of magnetos Lack of sufficient fuel Disconnect fuel line at...

Page 712: ...ixture too rich indicated by Readjustment of fuel injector running sluggish engine operation by authorized personnel is red exhaust flame at night indicated Extreme cases indicated by black smoke from exhaust Mixture too lean indicated by Check fuel lines for dirt or overheating or backfiring other restrictions Check fuel injection nozzles Leaks in induction system Tighten all connections in the i...

Page 713: ... tank with recommended fuel Faulty ignition Tighten all connections Check system with tester Check ignition timing Rough engine Cracked engine mount Replace or repair mount Defective mounting bushings Install new mounting bushings Uneven compression Check compression Low oil pressure Insufficient oil Fill sump with recommended oil Air lock or dirt in relief Remove and clean oil pressure valve reli...

Page 714: ...trainers Excessive blow by Usually caused by worn or stuck rings Failing or failed bearing Examine sump for metal particles If found overhaul of engine is indicated Defective temperature gauge Replace gauge Excessive oil consumption Low grade of oil Fill tank with oil conforming to specifications Failing or failed bearings Check sump for metal particles Worn piston rings Install new rings Incorrec...

Page 715: ...d to permit a maximum of 2 5 threads exposed on the bolt Torque to 230 240 inch pounds 1 SPINNER 2 PROPELLER 3 FUEL FLOW DIVIDER 4 OIL FILLER 5 OIL COOLER RIGHT 6 OIL COOLER LEFT 7 VENT TUBE 8 STARTER 9 GOVERNOR 10 FUEL NOZZLE 11 ENGINE MOUNT 12 VALVE OIL DRAIN 13 AIR FILTER 14 COVER FILTER 15 FILTER CAP 16 BOLT NUT WASHER 17 SANDWICH J 3049 38 OR J 3049 66 18 SPACER J 12333 2 OR Y 6769 1 S 19 ENG...

Page 716: ... AN7 34A BOLT AN960 716L WASHER 2 REQ D MS20365 720C NUT 2 REQ D J 7763 1 SANDWICH ISOLATOR FWD J 7763 1 SANDWICH ISOLATOR J 9613 19 MOUNTING KIT ENGINE MOUNT J 7766 2 SPACER J 9612 8 SANDWICH ISOLATOR J 2218 61 WASHER AN7 33A BOLT AN960 716L WASHER 2 REQ D MS20365 720C NUT 2 REQ D TYPICAL BOTH LOWER MOUNTS TYPICAL BOTH UPPER MOUNTS ENGINE MOUNT INSTALLATION FOR SARATOGA II HP Engine Installation ...

Page 717: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 71 00 00 Page 71 8 Reissued July 1 1993 3K23 Engine Mount Installation PA 32R 301 301T Dynafocal Mount Figure 2 ...

Page 718: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 71 00 00 Page 71 9 Reissued July 1 1993 3K24 Engine Mount Installation PA 32R 301T Lord Mounts Figure 3 ...

Page 719: ...agneto P leads at the magnetos 11 Disconnect the engine vent tube at the engine 12 Disconnect the engine oil temperature lead at the aft end of the engine 13 Disconnect the tachometer drive cable at the engine 14 Untie the ignition harness hoses and lines at the aft of the engine 15 Disconnect the vacuum pump lines at pump and remove the fittings from pump 16 Disconnect the oil pressure line at th...

Page 720: ...ollowing disconnections of environmental equipment are also necessary a Heater and defroster hoses at the muffler b Air conditioning compressor lines 7 The following engine lines should also be disconnected a Manifold pressure line at the right rear side of the engine b Oil pressure line at the engine c Vacuum pump lines at the pump d Deck pressure and fuel flow lines at the engine baffle e Fuel s...

Page 721: ...low divider 7 Connect the manifold pressure line at the right rear side of the gauge 8 Connect the static and fuel flow line at the right rear engine baffle 9 Connect the oil pressure line 10 Install the line fitting in the vacuum pump and install lines 11 Connect the tachometer drive cable 12 Connect the oil temperature lead 13 Connect the engine vent tube 14 Connect the oil cooler lines to each ...

Page 722: ...r head temperature and exhaust gas temperature leads 7 Mechanical connections necessary for engine installation are as follows a Governor control cable and secure with clamps b The throttle and mixture cables to the injector Check adjustment of the control c Connect the tachometer drive cable 8 The following connections of environmental equipment are also necessary a Heater and defroster hoses at ...

Page 723: ...ck of lubrication during initial starts after engine installa tion refer to the latest revision of Lycoming Service Instructions No 1241 for instructions on Pre Oiling Engines 12 Perform an engine operational check END PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 71 00 00 Page 71 14 Reissued July 1 1993 3L5 ...

Page 724: ...d to the landing light 4 Install the upper cowling REMOVAL OF COWLING PA 32R 301 II HP 1 Release quarter turn fasteners 5 on each side 2 on top aft 2 Remove machine screws from around intake 2 each side 3 Pull slightly aft and then up and remove upper cowling 4 Remove the screws securing the bottom cowling at its aft end and fuselage firewall flange 5 Remove screws which support bottom cowling to ...

Page 725: ...e bottom cowling to the nose gear doors support brackets outboard cowling flap hinge brackets and the fuselage firewall flange 7 Loosen the nuts attaching the air filter box to cowling brackets 8 Push nose gear doors inward against spring pressure and remove bottom cowling 9 Install cowling in reverse order of removal CLEANING INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF COWLING 1 Clean cowling with a suitable cleani...

Page 726: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 71 10 00 Page 71 17 Reissued July 1 1993 3L8 ...

Page 727: ...GRIDS 3L9 THRU 3L24 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 71 10 00 Page 71 18 Reissued July 1 1993 3L9 ...

Page 728: ...II HP MAINTENANCE MANUAL PA 32R 301 SARATOGA SP PA 32R 301 SARATOGA II HP PA 32R 301T SARATOGA SP Card 4 of 4 THIS HANDBOOK INCLUDES THE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION REQUIRED TO BE AVAILABLE BY FAR PART 23 Courtesy of Bomar Flying Service www bomar biz ...

Page 729: ...craft Corporation All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of the Piper Aircraft Corporation except for the inclusion of brief quotations in a review ...

Page 730: ... EFFECTIVITY CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY INTRODUCTION 4A4 July 1 1993 System Chapter Index Guide 4A4 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Introduction Contents Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 4A3 ...

Page 731: ...0 1C7 Time Limits 20 1C8 Scheduled Maintenance 50 1D2 Unscheduled Maintenance Checks 6 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 00 1D8 General 7 LIFTING AND SHORING 10 1D23 Jacking 8 LEVELING AND WEIGHING 10 1E3 Weighing and Balancing 20 1E4 Leveling 9 TOWING AND TAXIING 10 1E7 Towing 20 1E8 Taxiing 10 PARKING AND MOORING 10 1E11 Parking 20 1E12 Mooring 11 REQUIRED PLACARDS 20 1E15 Exterior Placards and Markings 30 1...

Page 732: ...OWER 00 1K1 General 30 1K3 DC Generation 40 1L19 External Power 50 1L21 Electrical Load Distribution 25 EQUIPMENT FURNISHINGS 10 2A15 Flight Compartment 27 FLIGHT CONTROLS 00 2A23 General 10 2B7 Aileron and Tab 20 2B18 Rudder and Tab 30 2C5 Elevator and Tab 50 2C21 Flaps 28 FUEL 00 2D14 General 10 2D20 Storage 20 2E10 Distribution 40 2E14 Indicating 29 HYDRAULIC POWER 00 2E21 General 10 2F19 Main ...

Page 733: ...ear and Doors 30 3C16 Extension and Retraction 40 3C22 Wheels and Brakes 60 3D18 Position and Warning 33 LIGHTS 00 3E2 General Compartment 10 3E6 Flight Compartment 40 3E8 Exterior 34 NAVIGATION AND PITOT STATIC 00 3E14 General 10 3E18 Flight Instrtuments Pitot Static 20 3E22 Attitude Direction 40 3F2 Independent Position Determining 35 OXYGEN 00 3F10 General 10 3F12 Crew Passenger 37 VACUUM 00 3G...

Page 734: ... 55 STABILIZERS 10 3I6 Horizontal Stabilizers 30 3I12 Vertical Stabilizer 40 3I14 Rudder 56 WINDOWS 10 3I18 Flight Compartment 20 3I20 Cabin 57 WINGS 00 3J2 General 20 3J4 Auxiliary Structure 40 3J6 Attach Fittings 50 3J12 Flight Surfaces 61 PROPELLERS 10 3J20 Propeller Assembly 20 3K6 Controlling 70 STANDARD PRACTICES ENGINE 00 3K12 General 71 POWER PLANT 00 3K16 General 10 3L6 Cowling PIPER AIRC...

Page 735: ...ing 77 ENGINE INDICATING 00 4C13 General 10 4C13 Power 20 4C16 Temperature 78 EXHAUST 00 4C23 General 79 OIL 20 4D7 Distribution 30 4D7 Indicating 80 STARTING 00 4D11 General 10 4D15 Cranking 81 TURBINES 20 4E1 Turbo Supercharger 91 CHARTS WIRING DIAGRAMS 00 4E16 General 10 4F19 Electrical Schematics 95 SPECIAL PURPOSE EQUIPMENT 00 4J8 Special Purpose Equipment END PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T M...

Page 736: ...GRIDS 4A9 THROUGH 4A12 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL Introduction Page 6 Reissued July 1 1993 4A9 ...

Page 737: ...CHAPTER 73 ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM 4A13 ...

Page 738: ...32R 301 4A15 July 1 1993 73 10 00 Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle PA 32R 301T 4A16 July 1 1993 73 10 00 Removal of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle PA 32R 301T 4A16 July 1 1993 73 10 00 Cleaning and Inspection of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle PA 32R 301T 4A16 July 1 1993 73 10 00 Installation of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle PA 32R 301T 4A16 July 1 1993 73 10 00 Adjustment of Idle Speed and Mixture 4A19 July 1 1993 73 20 00 CONTROLLI...

Page 739: ...trainer O rings should be replaced To install the screen assembly place the gasket on the screen assembly and install the assembly in the throttle body and tighten to 35 40 inch pounds torque FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE PA 32R 301 REMOVAL OF FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE PA 32R 301 The nozzles must be carefully removed as they or the cylinders may be damaged 1 Remove the lower engine cowl 2 Disconnect the fuel ...

Page 740: ...zzle O rings if found to be cracked brittle or distorted 3 A test procedure for air bleed nozzles is described on latest revision of Lycoming Service Instruction No 1275 INSTALLATION OF FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE PA 32R 301T 1 It is important for the nozzles to be correctly positioned with the bleed hole upward CAUTION Start nozzles and line couplings by hand to prevent the possi bility of cross thread...

Page 741: ...NANCE MANUAL 73 10 00 Page 73 3 Reissued July 1 1993 4A17 1 THROTTLE ARM 2 IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT 3 IDLE MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT 4 FUEL SCREEN 5 MIXTURE ARM 6 THROTTLE CONTROL CABLE 7 WASTE GATE INTERCONNECT 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 Fuel Injector Figure 1 ...

Page 742: ...E VALVE THROTTLE LEVER IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT FUEL INLET IDLE VALVE LEVER IDLE MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT IMPACT TUBE BALL SERVO VALVE FUEL DIAPHRAGM AIR DIAPHRAGM CONSTANT EFFORT SPRING CONSTANT HEAD IDLE SPRING MANUAL MIXTURE CONTROL AND IDLE CUT OFF LEVER IDLE VALVE LEVER CONNECTED TO THROTTLE LEVER LINKAGE METERING JET SECTION AA AIR INLET VENTURI Schematic Diagram of RSA Fuel Injection System Figure 2...

Page 743: ...PM if not preceded by a momentary increase indicates the idle mixture is too lean 5 If the above indicates that the idle adjustment is too rich or too lean turn the idle mixture adjustment in the direction required for correction and check this new position by repeating the above procedure Make additional adjustments as necessary until a check results in a momentary pick up of approxi mately 5 nev...

Page 744: ...ttle adjusted to obtain a clearance of 010 to 030 adjust the micro switch to actuate at this point also d Reconnect the clevis end to the control arm and safety 2 The mixture may be adjusted as follows a At the fuel injector disconnect the clevis end of the mixture control cable from the control arm Loosen the jam nut that secures the clevis end b Adjust the linkage by rotating the clevis end on t...

Page 745: ...1 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 73 20 00 Page 73 7 Reissued July 1 1993 4A21 1 RETAINER 2 SPRING 3 CAP 4 O RING 5 O RING 6 NOZZLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 010 TO 0 030 STOP Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle Figure 3 Adjustment of Engine Controls Figure 4 ...

Page 746: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 73 20 00 Page 73 8 Reissued July 1 1993 4A22 ...

Page 747: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 73 20 00 Page 73 9 Reissued July 1 1993 4A23 ...

Page 748: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 73 20 00 Page 73 10 Reissued July 1 1993 4A24 ...

Page 749: ...CHAPTER 74 IGNITION 4B1 ...

Page 750: ...0 Inspection of Impulse Coupling 4B15 July 1 1993 74 10 00 Impulse Coupling Installation 4B19 July 1 1993 74 20 00 DISTRIBUTION 4B22 July 1 1993 74 20 00 Ignition Harness 4B22 July 1 1993 74 20 00 Inspection of Harness 4B22 July 1 1993 74 20 00 Maintenance of Harness 4B22 July 1 1993 74 20 00 Spark Plugs 4C4 July 1 1993 74 20 00 Removal of Spark Plugs 4C4 July 1 1993 74 20 00 Inspection and Cleani...

Page 751: ...coupling is then released to spin the rotating magnet and produce the spark required to fire the engine After the engine starts the impulse coupling flyweights do not engage due to centrifugal action The coupling then acts as a straight drive and the magneto fires at the normal firing position of the engine PA 32R 301 II HP aircraft use Slick 6350 and 6351 individual type magnetos For service info...

Page 752: ...ming of magnetos Failure of engine to idle Faulty ignition system Check entire ignition system properly Low power and uneven Defective spark plugs Clean and gap or replace running spark plugs Magneto breaker points Clean points Check internal not working properly timing of magnetos Defective ignition wire Check wire with electric tester Replace defective wires Defective spark plug Replace connecto...

Page 753: ...r burning Figure 1 shows how the average contact point will look when surfaces are separated for inspection CAUTION Do not open point contacts more than 0625 of an inch for examination of contact surfaces Excessive spreading of the breaker points will overstress and damage the contact spring Desired contact surfaces have a dull gray sand blasted almost rough or frosted appearance over the area whe...

Page 754: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 10 00 Page 74 4 Reissued July 1 1993 4B6 Height of Spring in Distributor Block Tower Figure 1 Contact Points Figure 2 ...

Page 755: ...for either clockwise R or counterclockwise L rota tion of the magneto as viewed from the magneto drive end The timing tooth of the large distributor gear is marked with red paint Refer to Figure 6 3 When correctly timed internally a magneto will have the timing teeth of the large distributor gears approximately centered in the timing windows the R or L E gap mark on the rotor in alignment with the...

Page 756: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 10 00 Page 74 6 Reissued July 1 1993 4B8 Engine Timing Marks Figure 3 Timing Light Connected to Magneto Figure 4 ...

Page 757: ...agneto in its No 1 firing position tooth in window center and pointer over R or L mark on rotor install the magneto to the engine and loosely clamp in position NOTE Engine should be in No 1 firing position of 20 cylinder BTDC 11 Attach red lead from the 11 9110 timing light to the left switch adapter lead the green timing light lead to the right switch adapter lead and the black timing light lead ...

Page 758: ...ng light mentioned in step 13 should go OFF Continue turning the engine in its normal direction of rotation until the other timing light goes OFF This should not be more than 3 engine degrees later than the first light 16 Repeat steps 12 13 and 14 until the condition described in step 15 is obtained 17 Complete tightening of the magneto securing clamps by torquing to 150 inch pounds 18 Recheck tim...

Page 759: ...Magnetos Showing Position of Air Tube Figure 8 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 10 00 Page 74 9 Reissued July 1 1993 4B11 ...

Page 760: ... magneto in direction of rotation until adjacent R E gap mark is aligned with pointer and lock in position Both red painted teeth should be approximately centered in timing windows NOTE The use of the timing light unit part number 11 9110 1 avail able from Bendix will simplify the internal timing procedure and breaker synchronization 10 Connect the timing light black lead to any unpainted surface ...

Page 761: ... securing screws to 20 25 inch pounds If point opening is out of limits repeat timing procedure setting left main breaker opening at 016 002 inch If right contacts open beyond 020 inch set left contacts closer to 018 inch If right contacts open less than 012 inch set left contacts closer to 014 inch 18 Using timing light recheck timing to insure main breaker open within one half the width of R mar...

Page 762: ...Cam End View of Magneto Figure 9 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 10 00 Page 74 12 Reissued July 1 1993 4B14 ...

Page 763: ...ge puller over protective cap and cam assembly with wide jaws of puller hooked under cam assembly as shown in Figure 10 4 Tighten puller handle to remove coupling from shaft If coupling does not release with maximum hand torque at puller handle apply penetrating thread release compound between coupling and shaft Then while puller is still fully tightened hold tip of hot heavy duty soldering iron i...

Page 764: ...AFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 10 00 Page 74 14 Reissued July 1 1993 4B16 Removing Impulse Coupling Figure 10 Checking Flyweight to Stop Pin Clearance Figure 11 Stop Pin Installation Dimension Figure 12 ...

Page 765: ...y worn remove pins using a suitable drift and arbor press Press new pins into flange until dimension shown in Figure 12 is obtained 3 Visually inspect flyweight securing washers and flyweights particularly in area around the axle hole for cracks Grip washers with pliers and exert moderate turning force to check looseness If washer moves or any cracks are found reject cam assembly 4 Inspect for axi...

Page 766: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 10 00 Page 74 16 Reissued July 1 1993 4B18 Points of Coupling Body Wear Figure 15 Acceptable and Deformed Coupling Springs Figure 16 ...

Page 767: ...embly and body for magnetization which would prevent flyweights from engaging Hold the assembly as shown in Figure 17 and push upper flyweight against body When released flyweight must drop down If flyweight sticks to body parts are magnetized and coupling may not function Perform test on both flyweights 2 To demagnetize place body over shaft of a charged rotating magnet and spin body rapidly by h...

Page 768: ... 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 10 00 Page 74 18 Reissued July 1 1993 4B20 Checking Impulse Coupling for Magnetization Figure 17 Orientation of Spring in Coupling Body Figure 18 Lifting Inner End of Spring Figure 19 ...

Page 769: ...m only enough to clear projections on the body Wind spring one half turn and re engage the cam assembly into the body 9 Tension of the spring assembly in the assembled coupling when wound to point of impulse tripping must not be less than 9 or more than 15 inch pounds END PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 10 00 Page 74 19 Reissued July 1 1993 4B21 ...

Page 770: ...serve that the continuity lamp illuminates 6 Test insulation resistance of each harness lead by using the 11 8888 or 11 8888 1 tester as follows a Attach the red high voltage test lead to contact spring of harness lead Refer to Figure 21 b Attach the black test lead to the ferrule of the same harness lead Refer to Figure 21 c Depress PRESS TO TEST pushbutton switch d Observe that indicator lamp fl...

Page 771: ...MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 20 00 Page 74 21 Reissued July 1 1993 4B23 Checking Harness Lead Continuity Figure 20 Checking Harness Lead Insulation Resistance Figure 21 Modified Pliers Figure 22 Removing Spring from Lead Assembly Figure 23 ...

Page 772: ...pring retainer assembly as shown in Figure 25 Screw the cable terminal into the tool d Work insulating sleeve and spring retainer assembly into position over the cable and unscrew the tool Install contact spring on cable terminal NOTE It may be necessary to lubricate the cable and insulating sleeve with a thin film of DC 200 200 000 centistokes or commer cial grade alcohol to facilitate assembly 5...

Page 773: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 20 00 Page 74 23 Reissued July 1 1993 4C1 Assembly Tool Figure 24 Using Assembly Tool Figure 25 ...

Page 774: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 20 00 Page 74 24 Reissued July 1 1993 4C2 Ferrule Positioned Under Braid Figure 26 Ferrule Seating Tool Figure 27 ...

Page 775: ... 00 Page 74 25 Reissued July 1 1993 4C3 Position of 11 8627 Kit and Contact Spring at Start of Installation Figure 28 Position of 11 8627 Kit and Contact Spring after Installation Figure 29 Lubricating Sleeve Figure 30 Lubricating Ferrule Shoulder Figure 31 ...

Page 776: ...to spark plug barrel Lightly lubricate the shoulder of ferrule to minimize twisting of ferrule Refer to Figure 31 Use GO JO NO LOK manufactured by Goger Inc Akron Ohio 44309 10 Check cam securing screw Screw must be torqued to 16 20 inch pounds 11 With all high tension terminal grommets seated against the ferrules in the cover attach the bottom capacitor lead to the right main breaker and then the...

Page 777: ...he engine In the course of engine operation carbon and other combus tion products will be deposited on the end of the spark plug and will penetrate the lower threads to some degree As a result greater torque is frequently required for removing a plug than for its installa tion Accordingly the torque limitations given do not apply to plug removal and sufficient torque must be used to unscrew the pl...

Page 778: ...NSPECTION AND CLEANING OF SPARK PLUGS 1 Visually inspect each spark plug for the following non repairable defects a Severely damaged shell or shield threads nicked up stripped or cross threaded b Badly battered or rounded shell hexagons c Out of round or damaged shielding barrel d Chipped cracked or broken ceramic insulator portions e Badly eroded electrodes worn to approximately 50 of original si...

Page 779: ...rument panel and withdraw the switch from the panel 4 Mark the wires and note their position on the switch then disconnect the wires INSTALLATION OF IGNITION SWITCH Refer to Figure 33 1 Attach wires to switch as shown in Figure 33 2 Install the ignition switch in the instrument panel 3 Connect the power lead to the battery PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 30 00 Page 74 29 Reiss...

Page 780: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 30 00 Page 74 30 Reissued July 1 1993 4C8 ...

Page 781: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 30 00 Page 74 31 Reissued July 1 1993 4C9 ...

Page 782: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 74 30 00 Page 74 32 Reissued July 1 1993 4C10 ...

Page 783: ...CHAPTER 77 ENGINE INDICATING 4C11 ...

Page 784: ...auge 4C15 July 1 1993 77 20 00 TEMPERATURE 4C16 July 1 1993 77 20 00 Oil Temperature Indicator 4C16 July 1 1993 77 20 00 Exhaust Gas Temperature Gauge 4C16 July 1 1993 77 20 00 Removal of EGT Probe and Gauge 4C16 July 1 1993 77 20 00 Cleaning and Inspection of EGT 4C17 July 1 1993 77 20 00 Installation of EGT Probe and Gauge 4C17 July 1 1993 77 20 00 Cylinder Head Temperature Gauge 4C18 July 1 199...

Page 785: ...UBLESHOOTING MANIFOLD PRESSURE INDICATOR PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 77 10 00 Page 77 1 Reissued July 1 1993 4C13 Trouble Cause Remedy Excessive error at existing Pointer shifted Replace instrument barometric pressure Excessive error when engine Line leaking Tighten line connections is running Sluggish or jerky pointer Defective instrument Replace instrument movement Dull or ...

Page 786: ...use Remedy No reading on indicator Broken shaft Replace instrument either permanent or inter mittent Loose cable connections Tighten cable Pointer oscillates excessively Rough spot on or sharp Repair or replace bend in shaft Excessive friction in Replace instrument instrument Indicator changes in climb Excessive clearance in Replace instrument speed cup Pointer goes all the way to Excessive lubric...

Page 787: ... passage CHART 3 TROUBLESHOOTING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 77 10 00 Page 77 3 Reissued July 1 1993 4C15 Trouble Cause Remedy Excessive error at zero Pointer loose on shaft Replace instrument Overpressure or seasoning of bourdon tube Excessive scale error Improper calibration ad Replace instrument justment Excessive pointer oscillation Air in line o...

Page 788: ...e leads to the gauge are defective in any way they should be replaced When replacing leads it is very important to use the same type and length of wire as the resistance of the leads is critical for the proper operation of this gauge The EGT probe is the clamp mounted type which is adjusted for proper depth into the exhaust stream PA 32R 301T models incorporate a TIT probe mounted in the exhaust t...

Page 789: ...ther end of full travel it will shut instrument off and no indication will be shown on the pointer If meter still does not read replace it CAUTION Do not connect ohmmeter It will burn out the movement of the meter INSTALLATION OF EGT PROBE AND GAUGE 1 Install the probe and secure with locknut or clamp 2 Route the thermocouple wires along with the existing wire harness to the instrument panel 3 Ins...

Page 790: ...rature using a sender located in the 2 cylinder head It is an electrical instrument and it is wired through the instruments circuit breaker CHART 6 TROUBLESHOOTING CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE GAUGE PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 77 20 00 Page 77 6 Reissued July 1 1993 4C18 Position of TIT Probe PA 32R 301T Figure 1 Trouble Cause Remedy Instrument shows no Power supply wire broken ...

Page 791: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 77 20 00 Page 77 7 Reissued July 1 1993 4C19 ...

Page 792: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 77 20 00 Page 77 8 Reissued July 1 1993 4C20 ...

Page 793: ...CHAPTER 78 EXHAUST 4C21 ...

Page 794: ...FFECTIVITY CHAPTER SECTION SUBJECT GRID NO EFFECTIVITY 78 00 00 GENERAL 4C23 July 1 1993 78 00 00 Inspection of Exhaust System 4C23 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 78 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 4C22 ...

Page 795: ...l exhaust shields cabin heat shroud heat blankets etc as required to permit inspection of the complete system Perform the necessary cleaning operations and inspect all external surfaces for dents cracks and missing parts Pay particular attention to welds clamps supports and support attachment lugs slip joints stack flanges and gaskets Inspect internal baffles or diffusers on PA32R 301 Any cracks w...

Page 796: ...s mislocated remove and reinstall the shroud in the proper position c Mislocation of the shroud could result in shifting of the shroud with a resulting reduction of cabin heat and possible inability of the nose landing gear to fully extend to its down lock position NOTE When coupling exhaust pipe slip joints it is recommended that Fel Pro type C5 A anti seize lubricant be applied to the entire joi...

Page 797: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 78 00 00 Page 78 3 Reissued July 1 1993 4D1 Exhaust System Inspection Points PA 32R 301 SP Figure 1 ...

Page 798: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 78 00 00 Page 78 4 Reissued July 1 1993 4D2 Exhaust System Inspection Points PA 32R 301 II HP Figure 2 ...

Page 799: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 78 00 00 Page 78 5 Reissued July 1 1993 4D3 ...

Page 800: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 78 00 00 Page 78 6 Reissued July 1 1993 4D4 ...

Page 801: ...CHAPTER 79 OIL 4D5 ...

Page 802: ...ly 1 1993 79 20 00 Installation of Oil Cooler 4D7 July 1 1993 79 30 00 INDICATING 4D7 July 1 1993 79 30 00 Oil Pressure Sensor 4D7 July 1 1993 79 30 00 Removal of Oil Pressure Sensor 4D7 July 1 1993 79 30 00 Installation of Oil Pressure Sensor 4D7 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 79 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued July 1 1993 4D6 ...

Page 803: ...5 foot pounds another fitting should be used 5 When attaching lines to the cooler a backup wrench should be used 6 After installation inspect the cooler for distorted end cups 7 Run up engine After run up check for oil leaks INDICATING OIL PRESSURE SENSOR REMOVAL OF OIL PRESSURE SENSOR Access to the sensor unit gained by reaching up under the instrument panel Removal is accomplished by the followi...

Page 804: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 79 30 00 Page 79 2 Reissued July 1 1993 4D8 ...

Page 805: ...CHAPTER 80 STARTING 4D9 ...

Page 806: ...ly 1 1993 80 10 00 Brushes 4D16 July 1 1993 80 10 00 Armature 4D16 July 1 1993 80 10 00 Field Coils 4D16 July 1 1993 80 10 00 Brush Holders 4D18 July 1 1993 80 10 00 Gear and Pinion Housing 4D18 July 1 1993 80 10 00 Bendix Drive 4D18 July 1 1993 80 10 00 Assembly of Starting Motor 4D18 July 1 1993 80 10 00 Bench Test 4D18 July 1 1993 80 10 00 Starting Motor Control Circuit 4D19 July 1 1993 80 10 0...

Page 807: ...h of the reduction gear that drives the Bendix shaft The shaft is keyed to the reduction gear The Bendix drive is held in position on the shaft by a spiral pin The shaft is supported in the gear housing by a closed end roller bearing and in the pinion housing by a graphtized bronze bearing When the armature turns the reduction gear the Bendix drive pinion meshes with the flywheel ring gear by iner...

Page 808: ...s should be wiped clean with a cloth moistened with undoped gasoline gasoline having no anti knock additives A new brush should be run in until at least 50 percent seated however if facilities are not available for running in brushes then the brush should be properly seated by inserting a strip of number 000 sandpaper between the brush and com mutator with the sanded side next to the brush Pull sa...

Page 809: ...possible or circuit replace with a new part Low motor and cranking Worn rough or improperly Disassemble clean inspect speed lubricated motor or starter and relubricate replacing gearing ball bearings if worn Same electrical causes as Same remedies listed for listed under Motor fails to these troubles operate Excessive arcing of motor Binding worn or improperly See information above brushes seated ...

Page 810: ...Exploded View of Gear Reduction Starting Motor Figure 1 END PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 80 00 00 Page 80 4 Reissued July 1 1993 4D14 ...

Page 811: ...ry ground post to starter frame 0 1 volt maximum NOTE If voltage loss is greater than the above limits additional tests should be made over each part of the circuit to locate the high resistance connections 3 No lubrication is required on the starting motor except at the time of overhaul Then lubricate the entire shaft under Bendix Drive fill grooves in armature shaft at drive end and pack gear bo...

Page 812: ...l length or less they should be replaced ARMATURE 1 Check the commutator for uneven wear excessive glazing or evidence of excessive arcing If only slightly dirty glazed or discolored the commutator can be cleaned with 00 or 000 sandpaper If the commutator is rough or worn it should be turned in a lathe Refer to Figure 2 The armature shaft should be inspected for rough bearing surfaces and rough or...

Page 813: ...RAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 80 10 00 Page 80 7 Reissued July 1 1993 4D17 Turning Starting Motor Commutator Figure 2 Testing Motor Armature for Shorts Figure 3 Testing Motor Fields for Grounds Figure 4 ...

Page 814: ...motor after sanding NOTE The spring tension is 32 to 40 ounces with new brushes This tension is measured with the scale hooked under the brush spring near the brush and the reading is taken at right angles to the line of force exerted by the brush spring 3 Check the position of the pinion to be sure the unit will mesh properly with the flywheel ring gear See specifications for unit for correct dim...

Page 815: ... normal starting If loss is in excess of 0 2 volts per 100 amperes the solenoid should be replaced 3 If solenoid fails to operate when the manual starting switch is turned on or if it fails to release when the manual starting switch is released it should be removed and tested to specifications If either open ing or closing voltages are not to specifications replace the solenoid PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 3...

Page 816: ... OFF 3 Connect the external battery to the external power receptacle turn master switch ON and start engine using normal starting procedure 4 Turn master switch OFF remove external battery and then reconnect the battery at the negative terminal 5 Turn master switch ON PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 80 10 00 Page 80 10 Reissued July 1 1993 4D20 CHART 2 STARTING MOTOR SPECIFICATIO...

Page 817: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 80 10 00 Page 80 11 Reissued July 1 1993 4D21 ...

Page 818: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 80 10 00 Page 80 12 Reissued July 1 1993 4D22 ...

Page 819: ...CHAPTER 81 TURBINES 4D23 ...

Page 820: ...00 Removal of Turbocharger 4E7 July 1 1993 81 20 00 Installation of Turbocharger 4E7 July 1 1993 81 20 00 Exhaust Wastegate Assembly 4E8 July 1 1993 81 20 00 Removal of Exhaust Wastegate Assembly 4E8 July 1 1993 81 20 00 Installation of Exhaust Wastegate Assembly 4E8 July 1 1993 81 20 00 Adjustment of Exhaust Wastegate Assembly 4E8 July 1 1993 81 20 00 Turbocharger Decoking 4E9 July 1 1993 81 20 0...

Page 821: ...0 Page 81 1 Reissued July 1 1993 4E1 Trouble Cause Remedy Excessive noise or Improper bearing lubrication Supply required oil pressure vibration Clean or replace oil line clean oil strainer If trouble persists overhaul turbo charger Leak in engine intake Tighten loose connections or exhaust manifold or replace manifold gaskets as necessary Dirty impeller blades Disassemble and clean Engine will no...

Page 822: ...uct for restrictions to air flow Bootstrapping Operate engine within range outlined in operation manual NOTE Smoke would be normal if engine has idled for a prolonged period High deck pressure Waste gate sticking Butterfly shaft binding Compressor discharge closed Check bearings pressure Replace waste gate valve or correct interconnect control rigging Oil in induction housing Engine idles too slow...

Page 823: ... slow Increase engine idle speed to turbo not turning a maximum of 700 RPM if turbo still smokes it must be overhauled or replaced Check interconnect control for proper adjustment Waste gate won t close Broken linkage Repair linkage and adjust completely waste gate to open or close position Improper adjustment Rerig interconnect control Turbine won t come up Worn or coked bearings Replace or overh...

Page 824: ...ure The pressure measured in the area downstream of the turbo compressor discharge and upstream of the engine throttle valve This should not be confused with manifold pressure Manifold Pressure The pressure measured downstream of the engine throttle valve and is almost directly proportioned to the engine power output Normalizing If a turbocharger system is used only to regain power losses caused b...

Page 825: ...turbo speed would change the compressor would pump more air to drive the turbine faster etc A turbocharged engine above critical altitude wastegate closed is similar to the example mentioned above except now there is an engine placed between the compressor discharge and turbine inlet Slight system changes caused the exhaust gas to change slightly which causes the turbine speed to change slightly w...

Page 826: ...Turbocharger Installation Figure 1 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 81 20 00 Page 81 6 Reissued July 1 1993 4E6 ...

Page 827: ...URBOCHARGER Refer to Figure 1 1 Remove the engine cowling Refer to Chapter 71 2 Remove the turbocharger compressor and turbine assembly by the following procedure a Disconnect the oil supply and return lines from the center section of the turbo CAUTION When removing or installing coupling clamp slide clamp over end of pipe before assembly Excessive spreading can lead to premature failure of clamp ...

Page 828: ...ppropriate washers bolt and nut NOTE If exhaust gas probe is removed refer to Chapter 77 Figure 1 for correct positioning of probe in exhaust system ADJUSTMENT OF EXHAUST WASTEGATE ASSEMBLY The exhaust wastegate butterfly valve is mechanically linked to the throttle control arm by means of the wastegate interconnect cable The wastegate may be adjusted as follows 1 Remove the engine cowling as desc...

Page 829: ... procedure 1 Disconnect the oil inlet and outlet lines from the turbocharger and allow all oil to drain 2 Cap the oil outlet port on the turbocharger 3 Pour the Mouse Milk into the oil inlet port of the turbocharger and allow the unit to soak overnight 4 Drain all Mouse Milk from the turbocharger and flush the unit with engine oil 5 Prime the turbocharger in accordance with Turbocharger Lubricatio...

Page 830: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 81 20 00 Page 81 10 Reissued July 1 1993 4E10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 831: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 81 20 00 Page 81 11 Reissued July 1 1993 4E11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 832: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 81 20 00 Page 81 12 Reissued July 1 1993 4E12 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 833: ...CHAPTER 91 CHARTS WIRING DIAGRAMS 4E13 ...

Page 834: ...versions 4E20 July 1 1993 91 00 00 Conversion Tables 4E21 July 1 1993 91 00 00 List of Consumable Materials 4F2 July 1 1993 91 00 00 Vendor Information 4F11 July 1 1993 91 00 00 Electrical Wire Coding 4F15 July 1 1993 91 00 00 Electrical Symbols 4F16 July 1 1993 91 10 00 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS INDEX 4F19 July 1 1993 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 Cont Effec Page 1 Reissued Jul...

Page 835: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 Cont Effec Page 2 Reissued July 1 1993 4E15 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 836: ...alues for flared fittings of various sizes and material CAUTION Do not overtorque fittings NOTE When flared fittings are being installed ascertain that the male threads are properly lubricated Torque the fittings in accordance with Chart 1 CHART 1 FLARE FITTING TORQUES PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 00 00 Page 91 1 Reissued July 1 1993 4E16 TORQUE INCH POUND TUBING ALUMINUM A...

Page 837: ...t on the bolt Before the nut makes contact with the bearing surface Add the friction drag torque to the specified torque to get the final torque NOTE If the bolt is stationary and the nut is torqued use the lower side of the torque range If the nut is stationary and the bolt is torqued use the higher side of the torque range 6 When torquing castellated nuts begin with minimum torque plus friction ...

Page 838: ...only the torque given in Chart 2 Unless otherwise specified when castellated nuts are used with a cotter pin on moving joints do not torque the nut Turn the nut onto the bolt until proper grip is established and alignment with the cotter pin hole is achieved Then install the cotter pin GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 Calibrate the torque wrench periodically to assure accuracy Recheck fre quently 2 Ascertai...

Page 839: ...0 NAS 679 NAS 679 NAS 1291 Nut bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits size in lbs in lbs in lbs in lbs in lbs in lbs Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 8 36 12 15 7 9 5 10 3 6 10 32 20 25 12 15 25 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 1 4 28 50 70 30 40 80 100 50 60 30 45 15 30 5 16 24 100 140 60 85 120 145 70 90 40 65 25 40 3 8 24 160 190 95 110 200 25...

Page 840: ... 128 3 8 375 38 9 525 25 64 391 39 9 922 13 32 406 41 10 319 27 64 422 42 10 716 7 16 438 44 11 112 29 64 45 11 509 453 15 32 469 47 11 906 31 64 484 48 12 303 500 50 12 700 13 097 52 516 33 64 13 494 53 531 17 32 13 891 55 547 35 64 14 288 56 562 9 16 37 64 578 58 14 684 15 081 59 594 19 32 15 478 61 609 39 64 15 875 62 625 5 8 16 272 64 641 41 64 16 669 66 656 21 32 17 065 67 672 43 64 17 462 69...

Page 841: ...Refer to Chart 4 Sheet 4 a Example Convert 1 5 inches to millimeters 1 Read down inches column to 1 inches 2 Read across top inch column to 0 5 3 Read down and across to find millimeters 1 5 inches is 38 10 millimeters 4 Procedure for Converting Fahrenheit F and Celsius C Centigrade Temperature Refer to Chart 4 Sheet 2 a Read number in middle column if in degrees Celsius C read Fahrenheit equivale...

Page 842: ... 38 9 20 4 0 132 22 270 518 0 23 3 10 14 0 137 78 280 536 0 17 8 0 32 0 143 33 290 554 0 12 22 10 50 0 148 89 300 572 0 6 67 20 68 0 154 44 310 590 0 1 11 30 86 0 160 00 320 608 0 4 44 40 104 0 165 56 330 626 0 10 00 50 122 0 171 11 340 644 0 15 56 60 140 0 176 67 350 662 0 21 11 70 158 0 182 22 360 680 0 26 67 80 176 0 187 78 370 698 0 32 22 90 194 0 193 33 380 716 0 27 78 100 212 0 198 89 390 73...

Page 843: ... AVDP 0 0625 LB AVDP 264 17 GAL 28 35 GRAMS 999 97 LITERS 437 5 GRAINS FEET 0 3048 METERS OUNCES FLUID 29 57 CU CM 12 000 MILS 1 805 CU IN 304 8 MM 0 3333 YARDS LB AVDP 453 6 GRAMS 7000 GRAINS FT LB 0 1383 M KG 16 0 OUNCES 0 001285 BTU 0 000000376 KW HR SQUARE INCH 6 4516 SQ CM FLUID OZ 8 DRAM POUND PER 0 0703 KG CM 29 6 CU CM SQUARE INCH SQUARED PSI GAL IMPERIAL 277 4 CU IN 1 201 U S GAL STATUTE ...

Page 844: ...1 981 2 006 0 08 2 032 2 057 2 082 2 108 2 133 2 159 2 184 2 209 2 235 2 260 0 09 2 286 2 311 2 336 2 362 2 387 2 413 2 438 2 463 2 489 2 514 INCHES 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 MILLIMETER 0 0 0 254 0 508 0 762 0 016 1 270 1 524 1 778 2 032 2 286 0 1 2 540 2 794 3 048 3 302 3 556 3 810 4 064 4 318 4 572 4 826 0 2 5 080 5 334 5 558 5 842 6 096 6 350 6 604 6 858 7 112 7 366 0 3 ...

Page 845: ...9398 23 64 0 3593 9 1262 13 64 0 2031 5 1594 35 0 110 2 794 64 0 036 0 9144 T 0 358 9 1281 7 0 201 5 1054 7 64 0 1093 2 7781 65 0 035 0 899 S 0 346 8 7884 8 0 199 5 0546 36 0 1065 2 7051 66 0 033 0 8382 11 32 0 3437 8 7300 9 0 196 4 9784 37 0 104 2 6416 1 32 0 0312 0 7937 R 0 339 8 6106 10 0 1935 4 9149 38 0 1015 2 5781 67 0 032 0 8128 Q 0 332 8 4328 11 0 191 4 8514 39 0 0995 2 5273 68 0 031 0 787...

Page 846: ...pany Royco 44 Royal Lubricants Co Anti Seize Compound TT A 580 Armite Product Armite Laboratories White Lead Base JAN A 669 Anti Seize Thread Fel Pro C5 A Fel Pro Incorporated Compound HIGH TEMPERATURE Buffing and Rubbing Automotive Type DuPont Company Compounds DuPont 7 Ram Chemical 69 Ram Chemicals Compound for Mirror Glaze Mirror Bright Polish Polishing Co Incorporated Plexiglas Polish and Clea...

Page 847: ...l Oil Company RR 28 Socony Mobil Oil Co Castrolease A1 Burmah Castrol LTD Low Temp Grease E P Texaco Incorp 5114 E P Grease Standard Oil of Calif AV55 Aeroshell Grease 7 Shell Oil Company Braycote 627S Mobil Grease 27 Mobil Oil Corporation B P Aero Grease 31B B P Trading Limited Grease Aircraft MIL G 3278 Unitemp E P Texaco Incorporated Instrumentation Gear and Actuator RPM Aviation Grease Standar...

Page 848: ...e General MIL G 81322 Marfax All Purpose Texaco Incorporated Purpose Wide Temperature Aeroshell No 6 Shell Oil Company Mobil Grease 77 Mobil Oil Corporation or Mobilux EP2 Shell Alvania EP2 Shell Oil Company Royco 22 Royal Lubricants Company Mobil Grease 28 Mobil Oil Corporation Aeroshell No 22 Shell Oil Company Grease High MIL G 3545 High Temp Grease Texaco Incorporated Temperature Marfak All Pur...

Page 849: ...ah Castrol LTD Grease Lubricating MIL G 6032 Royco 32 Royal Lubricant Plug Valve Gasoline Company and Oil Resistant Castrolease PV Burmah Castrol LTD Parker Fuel Lube 44 Parker Seal Company B P Aero Grease 32 B P Trading Limited L 237 Lehigh Tenneco Chemicals Co Inc Rockwell 950 Rockwell International Grease Waterproof Aero Lubriplate Fiske Brothers High and Low Refining Company Temperature Hot Me...

Page 850: ...56B Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT I 735 Local Supplier Isocryl Tape PMS C1012 2 Schnee Moorehead Chemicals Incorporated Kevlar Kevlar Kevlar Special Products Leak Detector MIL L 25567 ALPHA 73 U S Gulf Corporation Solution for Oxygen Leak Detector Oxygen Systems Type 1 Leak Tec 16 OX American Gas and Chemical Co LTD Loctite MIL S 22473 Loctite 290 Loctite Corporation Grade AA MIL S 22473 Loctite 2...

Page 851: ...e Company 1692 Low Temp Oil Texaco Incorporated Aviation Instrument Standard Oil Company Oil of California Royco 363 Royal Lubricants Co Rain Repellent FSCM 50150 Repcon Unelco Corporation Safety Walk Flextred 300 Wooster Products Pressure Sensitive Incorporated Sealant MIL S 11031B PRC 5000 Products Research PRC 383 Company PRC 307 Sealant Fuel RS 36b Stripper CEE BEE Chemical Co Tank Sealing thi...

Page 852: ...A 0340 Polyamid Hardener Sealant Fuselage Class A 1 2 A 2 B 2 H S Bancroft Corp Structure B 4 B 6 B 8 EC 1239 Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Industrial Specialties Division EC 612 Leak Marker or Weatherstripping etc G E SS 4004 Primer General Electric RTV 88 with Silicone Products RTV 9811 Department Windshield MIL S 7502B B 1 4 PR 1221 Products Research B 1 2 B 2 B 4 B 8 Company B 12 PR 1425 ...

Page 853: ... Supplier Type I Stoddard Solvent Type II High Local Supplier Temperature Propeller Slip Ring CRC 2 26 Corrosion Reaction Cleaning Solvent Consultants Inc Toluol TT M 261 Local Supplier Trichlorethylene MIL T 7003 Perm A Clor Dextrex Chemical Industries Inc Turco 4217 Turco Products Inc Teflon Tape 003 x 5 wide 1 Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company Shamban W S and Co 003 x 25 wide 2 Johnson...

Page 854: ...Norton Tape Division Vinyl Black Plastic 2 in x 9 mil and or 1 1 2 in x 9 mil Corrosion Retardant MIL C 16173 D LPS 3 Heavy Duty Holt Lloyd Corp Compounds Piper P N 197 508 Rust Inhibitor Piper P N 197 509 Metal Parts Protector Chemi Cap Chemical Protector Flex Packaging Corp NOTE Take precautions when using MIL G 23827 and engine oil These lubricants contain chemicals harmful to painted surfaces ...

Page 855: ...ne Stanford CT 06902 Permacel Division Brittanic House 501 George Street London E C 2 Dukes Astronautics Co New Brunswick NJ 08901 England 7866 Deering Avenue 201 524 0400 Canoga Park CA 91304 K Bray Oil Company Kevlar Special Products 1925 N Marianna Avenue DuPont Company E I DuPont de Los Angeles CA 98103 Finishes Div Nemours Co Inc 213 268 6171 DuPont Building Textile Fibers Wilmington DE 19898...

Page 856: ...9200 215 972 2000 Royal Lubricants Company T Mobil Oil Corporation River Road Taxacone Company 150 E 42ND Street E Hanover NJ 07936 P O Box 10823 TR New York NY 10017 201 887 3100 Dallas TX 75208 212 883 4242 S N Schnee Moorhead Chemicals Texaco Inc Norton Tape Division Inc 2000 Westchester Avenue Department 6610 White Plains NY 10650 Troy NY 12181 Shamban W S and Co 914 253 4000 518 273 0100 1857...

Page 857: ...1 1993 4F13 Union Carbide Plastic Div 270 Park Avenue New York NY 10017 212 551 3763 V Virginia Chemical 3340 W Norfolk Rd Portsmouth VA 23703 703 484 5000 W Wooster Products Inc 1000 Spruce Street Wooster OH 44691 800 321 4936 In OH 216 264 2844 CHART 6 VENDOR INFORMATION Sheet 3 of 3 ...

Page 858: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 00 00 Page 91 23 Reissued July 1 1993 4F14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 859: ...R WIRE NUMBER WIRE GAUGE WIRE SEGMENT LETTER P7A 20 CIRCUIT FUNCTION CIRCUITS LETTER A AUTOPILOT C CONTROL SURFACE E ENGINE INSTRUMENT F FLIGHT INSTRUMENT G LANDING GEAR H HEATER VENTILATING DEICING L LIGHTING P POWER Q FUEL OIL RP RADIO POWER RZ RADIO AUDIO J IGNITION W WARNING K STARTER CHART 7 ELECTRICAL WIRE CODING ...

Page 860: ...LENOID VALVE SHIELDED CONNECTOR PUSH BUTTON SWITCH BUTT CONNECTORS SHIELDED CONDUCTORS CONNECTORS CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS OF CONDUCTORS THE DOT AT THE INTERSECTION INDICATES A JOINING OF CONDUCTORS CONDUCTORS FUSE RESISTOR LAMP GROUND BEACON PNEUMATIC SWITCH PNEUMATIC SWITCH THERMAL THERMAL BLOCK SWITCH POTENTIOMETER ELECTRICAL CLUTCH CIGAR LIGHTER SOCKET CHART 8 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PRESS NC OR VAC...

Page 861: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 00 00 Page 91 26 Reissued July 1 1993 4F17 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 862: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 00 00 Page 91 27 Reissued July 1 1993 4F18 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 863: ...p 4G9 COMFORT SYSTEMS Cigar Lighter 91 2 PA 32R 301 301T 4G10 CONTROL SYSTEMS Electric Flaps 91 29 Sheet 1 PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8513001 and up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8529001 and up 3229001 and up 4I18 91 29 Sheet 2 PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4I19 DE ICE SYSTEMS Lift Detector Heated 91 5 PA 32R 301T 4G12 Pitot Heat 91 4 PA 32R 301 S N s 32R ...

Page 864: ...eet 7 PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8129001 thru 32R 8129114 4G21 91 8 Sheet 8 PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8229001 thru 32R 8229068 4G22 91 8 Sheet 9 PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8329001 and up 4G23 Avionics Master Emergency Bus 91 9 PA 32R 301 301T Option 4G24 91 9A PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4G24 Ground Clearance 91 10 Sheet 1 PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8329001 and up Option 4H1 91 10 Sheet 2 PA 32R 301 ...

Page 865: ... 91 14 PA 32R 301 301T Early Models 4H8 91 14A PA 32R 301 301T Later Models not including S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4H8 91 14B PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4H8 INDICATORS Ammeter Low Voltage Monitor 91 36 PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4J1 Annunciator See Annunciator Systems Clock 91 15 PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013001 thru 32R 8013139 4H9 91 15A PA 32R 301T S N s 32...

Page 866: ...N s 32R 8029108 and up 4H15 91 18B PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4H16 LANDING GEAR SYSTEMS Landing Gear 91 19 Sheet 1 PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013001 thru 32R 8013119 4H17 91 19 Sheet 2 PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013120 and up and 3213001 4H18 91 19 Sheet 3 PA 32R 301 S N s 3213002 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 PA 32R 301T S N s 3229003 and up 4H19 91 19 Sheet 4 PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 ...

Page 867: ...13029 and 3213042 and up 4I22 Landing Light 91 21 Sheet 1 PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013001 and up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 PA 32R 301T 4I5 91 21 Sheet 2 PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4I6 Navigation and Strobe Lights 91 20D PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4I3 Recognition Lights 91 20E PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4I4 Wing Inspection Light 91 22 ...

Page 868: ...ading Lights 91 23 PA 32R 301 301T Early Models 4I8 91 23A PA 32R 301 Later Models See Figure 91 27 Sheet 2 for S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up PA 32R 301T Later Models 4I8 Switch Lights 91 35 PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4I24 VACUUM SYSTEM Standby Vacuum System 91 30 PA 32R 301 301T 4I20 WARNING SYSTEMS Baggage Door Ajar 91 31 PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up 4I21 Stall...

Page 869: ...THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 Cont Effec Page 7 Reissued July 1 1993 4G1 ...

Page 870: ...301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 28 Reissued July 1 1993 4G2 Annunciator Lights 5 Amp W1A 20 ALT VAC 50 6 5W OIL W2A 20 W2B 20 5 AMP TO AMMETER SHUNT P3B P3C 4 MASTER SOLENOID P1D AL1 4 P1B TO STARTER SOLENOID BATTERY LAMP TEST W4A 20 VACUUM SENSOR SWITCH 20 W4B W6A 20 20 W6B OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SWITCH ...

Page 871: ...301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 29 Reissued July 1 1993 4G3 W1A 20 5A W1B 20 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL 3 6 8 1 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL W2A 20 W2B 20 5 AMP P3B TO AMMETER SHUNT P3C 6 MASTER SOLENOID P1D BATTERY 4 P1B TO STARTER SOLENOID P1E W4A 20 20 W4B VACUUM SENSOR SWITCH W6A 20 20 W6B OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SWITCH ...

Page 872: ...01 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 30 Reissued July 1 1993 4G4 5A W1A 20 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL 3 6 8 1 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL W2A 20 W2B 20 5 AMP P3A TO AMMETER SHUNT P3C 6 MASTER SOLENOID P1D BATTERY 4 P1B TO STARTER SOLENOID P1E W4A 20 20 W4B VACUUM SENSOR SWITCH W6A 20 20 W6B OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SWITCH BAGGAGE DOOR AJAR SWITCH 9 W7A 20 ...

Page 873: ...Annunciator PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 1 Sheet 4 of 8 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 31 Reissued July 1 1993 4G5 ...

Page 874: ...Annunciator PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 1 Sheet 5 of 8 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 32 Reissued July 1 1993 4G6 ...

Page 875: ...ANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 33 Reissued July 1 1993 4G7 ANNUNCIATOR LIGHTS 5 AMP W1A 20 20 ALT VAC OIL OVER BOOST W1B W1C 20 20 20 20 W4A W6A W1D LAMP TEST 20 20 VACUUM SENSOR SWITCH OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SWITCH W4B W6B TO STARTER SOLENOID 4 P1B P1D AL1 BATTERY MASTER SOLENOID 6 P3C P3B TO AMMETER 5 AMP 20 20 W2B W2A MANIFOLD PRESSURE ...

Page 876: ...Page 91 34 Reissued July 1 1993 4G8 BATTERY P1B P1E P1D 4 TO STARTER SOLENOID MASTER SOLENOID 6 P3C TO AMMETER SHUNT 20 20 W2BA W2B 20 W2A ANNUNCIATOR PANEL 3 6 8 1 2 4 20 W1A 5A ANNUNCIATOR PANEL W4A 20 VACUUM SENSOR SWITCH 20 W4B W1B W1C MANIFOLD PRESSURE W1D W6A 20 20 W6B OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SWITCH Not applicable on s n s 32R 8129091 and up ...

Page 877: ...00 Page 91 35 Reissued July 1 1993 4G9 BATTERY P1B P1E P1D 4 TO STARTER SOLENOID MASTER SOLENOID 6 P3C TO AMMETER SHUNT 20 W2B 20 W2A ANNUNCIATOR PANEL 3 6 8 1 2 4 20 W1A 5A ANNUNCIATOR PANEL W4A 20 VACUUM SENSOR SWITCH 20 W4B W1B W1C MANIFOLD PRESSURE W1D W6A 20 20 W6B OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SWITCH 9 W7A 20 BAGGAGE DOOR AJAR SWITCH ...

Page 878: ... Lighter PA 32R 301 301T Figure 91 2 Windshield Heated Panel PA 32R 301T Figure 91 3 Pitot Heat PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013001 thru 32R 8013119 PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8029001 thru 32R 8029107 Figure 91 4 Pitot Heat PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013120 and up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 and PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8029108 and up Figure 91 4A PITOT STATIC HEAT 15A H2A 16 H2D 16 H2B 16 16 H2C STATIC...

Page 879: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 37 Reissued July 1 1993 4G11 Pitot Heat PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 4B THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 880: ...ERS 14V BUS 25A C B H2A1 12 H2A2 H2A3 H4B 14 H4A 14 12 12 12 12 H2A5 12 1 2 G6A 20 20 RELAY 5 100W RELAY 1 3 4 5 H2B H3A H2D H2A TO PITOT HEAT HTR TIED BACK SWITCH EXISTING 20A C B EXISTING PITOT HEAT PURPLE PURPLE GREEN GREEN BLUE BLUE WHT RED WHT RED H2A4 12 LIFT DETECTOR HEATER LIFT DETECTOR HEATER CASE HEATER TYPICAL TIED BACK TYPICAL TO TERM 4 L G STRIP ...

Page 881: ...IMER WIRING HARNESS DE ICER WIRING HARNESS TYPICAL PROP DE ICER TYPICAL SLIP RING ASSEMBLY BRUSH BLOCK ASSEMBLY TIMER OPTIONAL 3 BLADE PROPELLER BRUSH BLOCK ASSEMBLY PROP DE ICER TYPICAL DE ICER WIRING HARNESS TYPICAL SLIP RING ASSEMBLY D4A D5A GND GND 14 14 14 14 A B C A F D B TIMER WIRING HARNESS K2B P3D P2C P3A 4 4 4 14 TO VOLTAGE REGULATOR B F G ENGINE GROUND A AMMETER P9B P9A P8A P8B 20 20 20...

Page 882: ...VALVE OUTBOARD WING OVERBOARD DUMP VALVE LOCATED ON FIREWALL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES 20 GND PRESSURE SWITCHES D12C D12B 20 D12A 20 GND INDICATOR LIGHT NOTES 1 Timer cycle 18 Second Cycle sequenced as follows a 6 Seconds Inboard Wing Yellow Wire b 6 Seconds Outboard Wing White Blue Wire c 6 Seconds Tail Violet Wire The overboard dump valve is energized during the complete 18 second cycle restrictin...

Page 883: ...OR FIELD 5 AMP P2D P2A 14 14 ALTERNATOR SWITCH P2B 14 OVERVOLTAGE RELAY VOLTAGE REGULATOR RED YELLOW P2C 14 P3A 6 A P3B 6 P3D 6 ALTERNATOR FILTER CAPACITOR AMMETER TO ANNUNCIATOR W2B 20 5 AMP P3C 6 P1D P1E OPTIONAL EXTERNAL POWER SOLENOID EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE P4A 18 P4B 18 P1B MECHANICAL INTERLOCK TO STARTER SOLENOID ALTERNATOR SOURCE POWER RELAY ENERGIZING CIRCUIT MASTER SOLENOID MASTER SWIT...

Page 884: ...14 OVERVOLTAGE RELAY VOLTAGE REGULATOR RED YELLOW P2C 14 P3A 6 A P3B 6 P3D 6 ALTERNATOR FILTER CAPACITOR AMMETER TO ANNUNCIATOR W2B 20 5 AMP P3C 6 P1A AL1 OPTIONAL EXTERNAL POWER SOLENOID EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE P4A 18 P4B 18 P1B TO STARTER SOLENOID TO STARTER SOLENOID ALTERNATOR SOURCE POWER RELAY ENERGIZING CIRCUIT MASTER SOLENOID MASTER SWITCH M1A 5A TO OPTIONAL CLOCKS HOURMETER MECHANICAL SW...

Page 885: ...ATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR OVERVOLTAGE RELAY ALTERNATOR SWITCH P9A 20 P9B 20 TO AMMETER 20 P8B 20 P8A 5A 5A SHUNT IS PART OF P3A LEAD AMMETER SHUNT 20 W2B 5A P3A 6 P3C TO ANNUNCIATOR 20 M1D 20 M1A P1E P1D 4 5A TO CLOCK OPTIONS HOUR METER OPTION NARCO RADIO INSTALLATION BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT TO CABIN LIGHTING MASTER SOLENOID 1A P4A 18 P4B 18 BATTERY MASTER SWITCH ALTERNATOR SOURCE POWER RELAY ENERGIZING ...

Page 886: ...LTERNATOR SWITCH P9A 20 P9B 20 TO AMMETER 20 P8B 20 P8A 5A 5A SHUNT IS PART OF P3A LEAD AMMETER SHUNT 20 W2B 5A P3A 6 P3C TO ANNUNCIATOR 20 M1D 20 M1A P1E P1D 4 5A TO CLOCK OPTIONS HOUR METER OPTION NARCO RADIO INSTALLATION BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT TO CABIN LIGHTING MASTER SOLENOID 1A P4A 18 P4B 18 BATTERY MASTER SWITCH ALTERNATOR SOURCE POWER RELAY ENERGIZING CIRCUIT P1B 4 STARTER SOLENOID OPTIONAL EX...

Page 887: ... 45 Reissued July 1 1993 4G19 TO ANNUNCIATOR W2A20 P2 R2 1 1 W2B20 TO AMMETER P9B20 P8B20 50mv 100A SHUNT P3B4 P3C4 P3A4 ALTERNATOR FIELD 5A P2A14 P2B14 2 3 ALTERNATOR SWITCH 4 4 P2D20 RED BLK OVER VOLT VOLT REG BLUE P2C14 P3D4 B F G 90A ALT P1E4 BATTERY P1D4 MASTER SOLENOID P1C4 P1B4 P4A18 P4B18 2 3 BATT MASTER SWITCH TO STARTER SOLENOID P4C18N R2 P2 ...

Page 888: ...TERNATOR FIELD 5 AMP P2D P2A 14 14 ALTERNATOR SWITCH P2B 14 OVERVOLTAGE RELAY VOLTAGE REGULATOR P2C 14 P3A 6 A P3B 6 P3D 6 ALTERNATOR FILTER CAPACITOR AMMETER TO ANNUNCIATOR W2B 20 5 AMP P3C 6 P1A GND OPTIONAL EXTERNAL POWER SOLENOID EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE P4A 18 P4B 18 P1B MECHANICAL INTERLOCK TO STARTER SOLENOID ALTERNATOR SOURCE POWER RELAY ENERGIZING CIRCUIT MASTER SOLENOID MASTER SWITCH ...

Page 889: ...TERNATOR SWITCH P2B 14 OVERVOLTAGE RELAY VOLTAGE REGULATOR RED YELLOW P2C 14 P3A 6 A P3B 6 P3D 6 ALTERNATOR FILTER CAPACITOR AMMETER TO ANNUNCIATOR W2B 20 5 AMP P3C 6 P1A GND OPTIONAL EXTERNAL POWER SOLENOID EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE P4A 18 P4B 18 P1B TO STARTER SOLENOID TO STARTER SOLENOID ALTERNATOR SOURCE POWER RELAY ENERGIZING CIRCUIT MASTER SOLENOID MASTER SWITCH M1A 5A TO OPTIONAL CLOCK HOUR...

Page 890: ...CAPACITOR ALTERNATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR OVERVOLTAGE RELAY ALTERNATOR SWITCH P9A 20 P9B 20 TO AMMETER 20 P8B 20 P8A 5A 5A SHUNT IS PART OF P3A LEAD AMMETER SHUNT 20 W2B 5A P3A 6 P3C TO ANNUNCIATOR M1D 20 M1E GND P1A 5A TO CLOCK OPTIONS HOUR METER OPTION NARCO RADIO INSTALLATION TO CABIN LIGHTS MASTER SOLENOID P4A 18 P4B 18 BATTERY MASTER SWITCH ALTERNATOR SOURCE POWER RELAY ENERGIZING CIRCUIT P1B ST...

Page 891: ... 20 P9B 20 TO AMMETER 20 P8B 20 P8A 5A 5A SHUNT IS PART OF P3A LEAD AMMETER SHUNT 20 W2B 5A P3A 6 P3C TO ANNUNCIATOR M1D 20 M1A P1E P1D 4 5A TO CLOCK OPTIONS HOUR METER OPTION NARCO RADIO INSTALLATION BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT TO CABIN LIGHTS MASTER SOLENOID 1A P4A 18 P4B 18 BATTERY MASTER SWITCH ALTERNATOR SOURCE POWER RELAY ENERGIZING CIRCUIT P1B 4 STARTER SOLENOID OPTIONAL EXTERNAL POWER SOLENOID EXT...

Page 892: ...ANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 50 Reissued July 1 1993 4G24 MAIN BUS PR1A 18 PR2A 20 PR2B 20 PR1B PR3A PR3B 10 10 10 AVIONICS MASTER RELAY RADIO MASTER SWITCH INSTL 1 2 3 4 5 1 ON AVIONICS MASTER SWITCH AVIONICS BUS EMERG MASTER BUS SWITCH Avionics Master Switch PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 9A ...

Page 893: ...0 Page 91 51 Reissued July 1 1993 4H1 COM 1 AUDIO PANEL RP1 RP7 RP1 RP7 16 20 1 3 4 6 7 9 K101 RP1A GC1 RP7A GC2 16 16 20 20 TO COM 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER TO AUDIO PANEL CIRCUIT BREAKER GC1E GC2E 16 20 GC1D GC2D 20 16 5A 10A F1 F2 P1D BATTERY MASTER RELAY GROUND CLEARANCE SWITCH PUSH ON PUSH OFF GC1B 16 GC1C 16 GC1A 16 4 P1E 20 GC2C 20 GC2A 20 GC2B ...

Page 894: ...Ground Clearance PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 10 Sheet 2 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 52 Reissued July 1 1993 4H2 ...

Page 895: ...LIGHTER TO RADIO LIGHTS DIMMER TO MASTER SOLENOID TO EXTERNAL POWER Starter PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8029001 thru 32R 8029121 Figure 91 11 Starter PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013001 thru 32R 8013119 Figure 91 11A Starter PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013120 and up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8129001 and up Figure 91 11B P1C 6 K1C K1D 18 J2A J1A K1B 18 L2A 18 4 18 H1A L8A K2A P1B...

Page 896: ... AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 54 Reissued July 1 1993 4H4 Starter and Accessories PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 11C THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 897: ... AC21A AC1C AC2A 5A F3 FAN SW L H AC8A AC10A M BLOWER MOTOR AC1D AC17 AC3A AC2B AC19B AC4C AC4B AC4A AC3B AC15 AC3C AC20A S2 S3 S4 AIR COND SW MANIFOLD PRESS SW OPEN LIMIT SW PA 32R 301T NO NC OPEN RELAY DOOR MOTOR M K1 4 5 1 2 3 S5 S6 FREON PRESS SW THERMOSTAT COMPRESSOR CLUTCH NOTE SHOWN WITH AIR CONDITIONING FAN SWITCH IN OFF POSITION THROTTLE NOT WIDE OPEN AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH IN ON POSITIO...

Page 898: ...TCH P THERMOSTAT DOOR OPEN ANNUNCIATOR THROTTLE SWITCH C NC NO S5 S6 C NC NO S3 1 2 3 4 5 K2 DOOR CLOSE RELAY COMPRESSOR CLUTCH CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH C NC NO S7 AC19B AC21A AC6A AC5C AC2D AC3A AC2B AC2A AC1A AC5B 2 1 3 4 5 ON S2 AIR COND SWITCH F2 5A LO OFF HIGH FAN SWITCH CBI 20A AC5A 5A F1 14V BUS AC8A AC10A AC26A FAN MOTOR AC1C L H NOTE SHOWN WITH AIR CONDITIONING FAN SWITCH IN OFF POSITION THROTT...

Page 899: ...LOWER SWITCH BLOWER MOTOR M 14 Ventilation Blower PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013001 thru 32R 8013139 PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8029001 thru 32R 8029121 Figure 91 13 Ventilation Blower PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8113001 and up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 and PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8129001 and up Figure 91 13A Ventilation Blower PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 13B ...

Page 900: ...EL PUMP Q2A 18 Q2D 18 Q2B 18 ORANGE BLACK FUEL PUMP 10 AMP Q2A 18 18 18 18 Q2D Q2B Q2C FUEL PUMP FUEL PUMP SWITCH Fuel Pump PA 32R 301 301T Early Models Figure 91 14 Fuel Pump PA 32R 301 301T Later Models not including S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 14A Fuel Pump PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 14B ...

Page 901: ...013139 Figure 91 15 Clock Analog PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8029001 thru 32R 8029121 Figure 91 15A Analog and Digital Clock Option PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8113001 and up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8129001 and up Figure 91 15B PANEL LIGHTING DIGITAL CLOCK OPT ANALOG CLOCK OPT WHITE BLACK RED PWR GND OPTIONAL M2C TO HOUR METER TO FORWARD BAGGAGE LIGHT TO FORWARD CABIN LI...

Page 902: ...Clock Hour Meter and Baggage Compartment Light PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 15C PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 60 Reissued July 1 1993 4H10 ...

Page 903: ...arly Models Figure 91 16 ENGINE INSTR 5 AMP Q1A Q1C Q1E 20 20 20 Q3A Q3C Q3B 20 20 20 F OUTBD SENDER F INBD SENDER E E RED Q4A Q4C Q4B 20 20 20 RED F OUTBD SENDER F INBD SENDER E E Q5A Q5B 20 20 E1B 20 20 E1A ENGINE INSTR 5 AMP Q1A Q1C Q1E 20 20 20 XXQ3A XXQ3C Q3B 20 20 20 F OUTBD SENDER F INBD SENDER E E RED XXQ4A XXQ4C Q4B 20 20 20 RED F OUTBD SENDER F INBD SENDER E E Q5A Q5B 20 20 ...

Page 904: ... Q1C Q1H 20 20 20 XXQ3A XXQ3C Q3B 20 20 20 RED XXQ4A XXQ4C Q4B 20 20 20 RED Q5A Q5B 20 20 Q5C 20 20 Q1G 20 20 Q3D Q4D GND GND OUTBD SENDERS INBD SENDERS 20 20 Q1E Q1F GND GND P8C P9C 20 20 P9B P8B SEE ALT FIELD CIRCUIT E1BA E1B 20 20 20 E1A ENGINE INSTR 5 AMP Q1A Q1C Q1H 20 20 20 XXQ3A XXQ3C Q3B 20 20 20 RED XXQ4A XXQ4C Q4B 20 20 20 RED Q5A Q5B 20 20 20 Q1G 20 20 Q3D Q4D GND GND OUTBD SENDERS INBD...

Page 905: ...2R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 16E PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 63 Reissued July 1 1993 4H13 Engine Gauge PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 16D ...

Page 906: ... TO MASTER SOLENOID M1A M1B M1C 20 20 5A PRESS SWITCH HOUR METER TO MASTER SOLENOID M1A L5R L5D M1B M1C 20 20 20 20 PRESS SWITCH HOUR METER 5A Hour Meter PA 32R 301 not including S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 17 Hour Meter PA 32R 301T Figure 91 17A THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 907: ...ls Figure 91 18 TURN BANK 5A F2A 20 F2B 20 T B F2C PA 32R 301T STANDARD INSTALLATION F2B F2C T B T B PA 32R 301 STANDARD INSTALLATION BLK WHT F2E L9B TO DIMMER CONTROL TO COUPLER LIGHTS ALTERNATE LIGHTED INSTALLATION THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Turn and Bank PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013120 and up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 PA 32R 301T S N s 32R 8029108 and up Figure 91 18A ...

Page 908: ...IPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 66 Reissued July 1 1993 4H16 Turn and Bank PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 18B THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 909: ...J G3T 20 G3E TERMINAL 4 20 20 20 G1B G1E G1H TERMINAL 12 G1F G1A 20 20 NOTES 1 GEAR SHOWN IN DOWN LOCKED POSITION WITH STRUTS COMPRESSED AND THROTTLE CLOSED 2 LIGHT LEGEND R RED LIGHT Y YELLOW LIGHT G GREEN LIGHT W WHITE LIGHT 3 AUTOMATIC GEAR DOWN ACTUATOR SWITCH SHOWN IN LOW AIRSPEED POSITION 4 SWITCH LEGEND C COMMON NC NORMALLY CLOSED NO NORMALLY OPEN C C C L N R DN LOCKED UNLOCKED NO NO NO NC ...

Page 910: ... 12 G1F G1A 20 20 NOTES 1 GEAR SHOWN IN DOWN LOCKED POSITION WITH STRUTS COMPRESSED AND THROTTLE CLOSED 2 LIGHT LEGEND R RED LIGHT Y YELLOW LIGHT G GREEN LIGHT W WHITE LIGHT 3 AUTOMATIC GEAR DOWN ACTUATOR SWITCH SHOWN IN LOW AIRSPEED POSITION 4 SWITCH LEGEND C COMMON NC NORMALLY CLOSED NO NORMALLY OPEN C C C L N R DN LOCKED UNLOCKED NO NO NO NC NC NC DOWN LOCK SWITCH G1C G2A G1G G2B G1J G2C 20 20 ...

Page 911: ... WITH STRUTS COMPRESSED AND THROTTLE CLOSED 2 LIGHT LEGEND R RED LIGHT Y YELLOW LIGHT G GREEN LIGHT W WHITE LIGHT 3 SWITCH LEGEND C COMMON NC NORMALLY CLOSED NO NORMALLY OPEN C C C L N R DN LOCKED UNLOCKED NO NO NO NC NC NC DOWN LOCK SWITCH G1C G2A G1G G2B G1J G2C 20 20 20 20 20 20 T T 5 6 G1M G1N 20 20 20 20 20 G1D G1L G1K LEFT NOSE RIGHT G G G 20 G1P TO RADIO LIGHT DIMMER SWITCH G2P G2D G2F G2H ...

Page 912: ...20 1 1 12 1 G1F20 G3B20 G3BA20 G3D20 G3C20 G3CA20 11 11 G3JA20 G3K20 G3E20 G4A10 G3J20 G3T20 G3F20 G3R20 10 10 9 9 G3G20 G3P20 BLK GRN BLU 5 P5 R5 LANDING GEAR PUMP 25 G3H20 HYD PRESSURE SWITCH HYD PUMP MOTOR SQUAT SWITCH GEAR ACTUATOR UP SOLENOID DOWN SOLENOID R5 P5 P5 R5 R5 P5 DN UP UP DN 5 GE120 SEE SHEET 5 SEE SHEET 5 SEE SHEET 5 SEE SHEET 5 G2K20 BLK SEE SHEET 5 SEE SHEET 5 LANDING GEAR CONTR...

Page 913: ...G20 G2E20 G2D20 G2F20 G2F20 G2H20 G2K20 G2L20 G2Y20 G3L20 G2N20 G2P20 13 13 2 3 7 7 5 5 6 6 G1K20 G1L20 G1D20 TO GEAR ANNUNCIATOR LIGHTS DOWN LOCK SWITCHES GEAR UP GEAR DOWN RIGHT GEAR NOSE GEAR LEFT GEAR NO NO NO C C C NC NC NC 6 P5 P5 P5 R5 R5 R5 P5 P5 R5 R5 4 UP LOCK SWITCHES GEAR NOT UP GEAR UP LEFT GEAR NOSE GEAR RIGHT GEAR NC NC NC NO NO NO C C C ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT SEE ANNUN PANEL GEAR WARNIN...

Page 914: ...1H TERMINAL 12 G1F G1A 20 20 NOTES 1 GEAR SHOWN IN DOWN LOCKED POSITION WITH STRUTS COMPRESSED AND THROTTLE CLOSED 2 LIGHT LEGEND R RED LIGHT Y YELLOW LIGHT G GREEN LIGHT W WHITE LIGHT 3 AUTOMATIC GEAR DOWN ACTUATOR SWITCH SHOWN IN LOW AIRSPEED POSITION 4 SWITCH LEGEND C COMMON NC NORMALLY CLOSED NO NORMALLY OPEN C C C L N R DN LOCKED UNLOCKED NO NO NO NC NC NC DOWN LOCK SWITCH G1C G2A G1G G2B G1J...

Page 915: ... 20 20 NOTES 1 GEAR SHOWN IN DOWN LOCKED POSITION WITH STRUTS COMPRESSED AND THROTTLE CLOSED 2 LIGHT LEGEND R RED LIGHT Y YELLOW LIGHT G GREEN LIGHT W WHITE LIGHT 3 AUTOMATIC GEAR DOWN ACTUATOR SWITCH SHOWN IN LOW AIRSPEED POSITION 4 SWITCH LEGEND C COMMON NC NORMALLY CLOSED NO NORMALLY OPEN C C C L N R DN LOCKED UNLOCKED NO NO NO NC NC NC DOWN LOCK SWITCH G1C G2A G1G G2B G1J G2C 20 20 20 20 20 20...

Page 916: ...0A Anti Collision Wing Strobes Beacon Option PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013001 and up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 and PA 32R 301T Figure 91 20 ANTI COLLISION 10 AMP L4A L4B L4C 18 18 18 18 L4D POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL 7 WHITE STROBES ANTI COLLISION WING STROBES BEACON OPT 10A L4A L4D 18 18 18 L4E L4B L4C RED BLK 18 18 TERMINAL 7 BEACON L4F L4G 18 18 GND POWER SUPPLY L WING STROBE R WING STRO...

Page 917: ... L1G 18 18 R WING NAV L WING NAV L1F L1E 10A L4A 18 L4D 18 18 L4B 7 L4C 18 BEACON L4F 18 L4G 18 POWER SUPPLY LEFT RIGHT WING STROBES L4E 18 TAIL NAV OPTIONAL NAV STROBE BEACON 18 Anti Collision Beacon and Position Option PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013001 and up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 and PA 32R 301T Figure 91 20B ...

Page 918: ...UE BLUE BLUE 10A L4A 18 L4D 18 18 L4B 7 L4C 18 RED BLK BEACON L4F 18 L4G 18 POWER SUPPLY LEFT RIGHT WING STROBES L4E 18 STROBES ONLY STROBES AND BEACON OPTIONAL NAV STROBE BEACON Anti Collision Beacon and Position Option PA 32R 301 S N s 32R 8013001 and up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 and PA 32R 301T Figure 91 20C 91 10 00 Page 91 76 Reissued July 1 1993 4I2 ...

Page 919: ...Navigation and Strobe Lights PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 20D PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 77 Reissued July 1 1993 4I3 ...

Page 920: ...Recognition Lights PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 20E PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 78 Reissued July 1 1993 4I4 ...

Page 921: ...d up 3213001 thru 3213028 3213030 thru 3213041 and PA 32R 301T Figure 91 21 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 79 Reissued July 1 1993 4I5 LANDING LIGHT 10 AMP L3A 18 18 L3D L3B 18 L3C 18 LANDING LIGHT ...

Page 922: ...Landing Light PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 21 Sheet 2 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 80 Reissued July 1 1993 4I6 ...

Page 923: ... Inspection Light PA 32R 301 301T Figure 91 22 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 81 Reissued July 1 1993 4I7 ICE VIEWING LIGHT 14V BUS BAR 5A C B D8A 20 SWITCH 20 D9A LIGHT ...

Page 924: ... N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up PA 32R 301T Later Models Figure 91 23A Reading Lights PA 32R 301 301T Early Models Figure 91 23 PASSENGER READING LIGHTS 10 A L5A L5B L5C 18 18 18 FORWARD LEFT FORWARD RIGHT AFT LEFT AFT RIGHT PASSENGER READING LIGHTS 10 AMP L5A 18 18 L5B 18 GND FWD CABIN BATTERY 5A L5D L5E AFT CABIN OPTIONAL PASSENGER READING LIGHTS ...

Page 925: ...18 18 18 18 20 14 L2C NAVIGATION LIGHTS 10 AMP OPTIONAL SW PANEL LIGHTING OVERHEAD LIGHTS L1J L1C L1G L1B L8B L8A 14 18 18 14 18 18 POSITION LIGHTS RADIO LTS BUS TO START ACC C B TERMINAL 11 TO WIRE G1P LEFT GEAR LIGHT RADIO LIGHTS DIMMER CD26 L9C L9B L7B 20 20 20 20 CONSOLE LIGHTS COUPLER LIGHT COMPASS LIGHT L9D L9A 20 20 20 L9E CENTER EXTRUSION LIGHTS LOWER PANEL LIGHTS CLUSTER LIGHTS UPPER PANE...

Page 926: ...LIGHTS 10 AMP OPTIONAL SW PANEL LIGHTING OVERHEAD LIGHTS L1J L1C L1G L1B L8B L8A 14 18 18 14 18 18 POSITION LIGHTS RADIO LTS BUS TO START ACC C B TERMINAL 11 TO WIRE G1P LEFT GEAR LIGHT RADIO LIGHTS DIMMER CD26 L9C L9B L7B 20 20 20 20 CONSOLE LIGHTS COUPLER LIGHT COMPASS LIGHT L9D L9A 20 20 20 L9E CENTER EXTRUSION LIGHTS LOWER PANEL LIGHTS CLUSTER LIGHTS UPPER PANEL LIGHTS TO ELT INSTL INSTRUMENT ...

Page 927: ...ELT INSTL L7A 18 OPTIONAL SW PANEL LIGHTING L1A 14 NAVIGATION LIGHTS 10 AMP L1J 14 L1B 14 L1C L1G BLACK 18 18 L1F OPT FIN LIGHT BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE W G W R W TERMINAL 11 L8B L8A 20 18 RADIO LIGHTS BUS TO STARTER ACCESSORIES C B DIMMER CONTROL ASSEMBLY G1P TO GEAR LOCK LIGHTS 20 CENTER EXTRUSION LIGHTS L9E 20 L9A 20 LOWER PANEL LIGHTS L9D 20 L7B 20 L7C COMPASS LIGHT TO OXYGEN SYSTEM INSTL PA 32R 30...

Page 928: ...ANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 86 Reissued July 1 1993 4I12 SEE DIGITAL OR ELECTRIC CLOCK SEE HOUR METER M2C M1B L6A L6B BAGGAGE COMPT LIGHT SWITCH MANUAL M1D M1A 5A MASTER SOLENOID 4 P1D P1E BATT 18 L5D L6G 18 L6D 18 FWD BAGG COMPT LIGHT FWD BAGG COMPT SWITCH AUTOMATIC L6E BLK BLK WHT WHT AFT CABIN LIGHT SW FWD CABIN LIGHT SW L5E 18 ...

Page 929: ... 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 87 Reissued July 1 1993 4I13 MASTER SOLENOID P1D L6A L6B 5 AMP FWD BAGG COMPT LIGHT SWITCH Baggage Light Forward PA 32R 301 301T Figure 91 26 THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 930: ...3030 thru 3213041 and PA 32R 301T Figure 91 27 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 88 Reissued July 1 1993 4I14 P1D MASTER SOLENOID 5 AMP L6C L5D L6D BAGGAGE COMPT LIGHT AUTOMATIC SWITCH AFT CABIN LIGHT SWITCH FWD CABIN LIGHT SWITCH L5E L6B ...

Page 931: ...Courtesy Reading Lights PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 27 Sheet 2 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 89 Reissued July 1 1993 4I15 ...

Page 932: ...01T Figure 91 28 Sheet 1 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 90 Reissued July 1 1993 4I16 STALL WARNING 5 AMP F1A F1B F1E F1F F1C F1J 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 F1K F1L F1J STALL WARN HORN FLAP 0 10 deg 25 40 deg FLAP NC NO TERM 8 INBD LIFT DETECTOR OUTBD LIFT DETECTOR ...

Page 933: ...Stall Warning PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 28 Sheet 2 of 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 91 Reissued July 1 1993 4I17 ...

Page 934: ...2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 92 Reissued July 1 1993 4I18 EF14A EF14 EF13 1 2 3 EF16 FLAP IN TRANSIT LIGHT EF18 5 AMP MAIN BUS EF5 15 AMP EF6 EF4 EF5A EF3 EF12 EF1 EF10 D3 D1 EF8 EF7 EF11 EF2 D2 D4 EF9 EF16A EF15 RED BLK ACTUATOR A4 A3 A2 A1 X1 X2 K1 A4 A3 A2 A1 X1 X2 K2 3 3 2 2 1 1 P1 J1 EF19 EF21 EF20 C C NC NC NO NO S1 S2 BUS BAR ...

Page 935: ...CE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 93 Reissued July 1 1993 4I19 EF14A EF14 5 AMP MAIN BUS EF5 15 AMP EF6 EF4 EF5A EF3 EF12 EF1 EF10 D3 D1 EF8 EF7 EF11 EF2 D2 D4 EF9 EF16A EF15 RED BLK ACTUATOR A4 A3 A2 A1 X1 X2 K1 A4 A3 A2 A1 X1 X2 K2 3 3 2 2 1 1 P1 J1 EF19 EF21 EF20 C C NC NC NO NO S1 S2 BUS BAR EF16 2 2 J3A P3A TO ANNUNCIATOR PANEL ...

Page 936: ... EMI FILTER 4A3 1 AUX VAC PUMP BATTERY VAC OFF NC NO AUX VAC 1H5 21 MANIFOLD F7 85 1 SWITCH REAR FRONT F7 86 2 D C BUS VAC OFF AUX ON 5A 20A 2 PIN CONNECTOR F7 97 1 ETI ASSEMBLY 1 2 1 2 L1 L2 L3 L4 S N 3213029 AND 3213042 AND UP 373 17 NEG 373 15 POS 373 19 373 13 373 11 373 31 373 33 375 33 373 31 373 25 373 27 373 41 373 43 373 25 373 27 373 21 373 23 5A 20A D C BUS ...

Page 937: ...2R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 95 Reissued July 1 1993 4I21 Vacuum Inop PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 32 Baggage Door Ajar PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 31 ...

Page 938: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 96 Reissued July 1 1993 4I22 Flood Lights PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 33 ...

Page 939: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 97 Reissued July 1 1993 4I23 Post Lights Instrument Panel PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 34 ...

Page 940: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 98 Reissued July 1 1993 4I24 Switch Lights PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 35 ...

Page 941: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 99 Reissued July 1 1993 4J1 Ammeter Low Voltage Monitor PA 32R 301 S N s 3213029 and 3213042 and up Figure 91 36 ...

Page 942: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 100 Reissued July 1 1993 4J2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 943: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 101 Reissued July 1 1993 4J3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 944: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 91 10 00 Page 91 102 Reissued July 1 1993 4J4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 945: ...CHAPTER 95 SPECIAL PURPOSE EQUIPMENT 4J5 ...

Page 946: ...g Control Surfaces 4J9 July 1 1993 95 00 00 Gear Back Up Extender Actuator Aligning Tool 4J11 July 1 1993 95 00 00 Fabricated Tool for Baggage Door Lock 4J12 July 1 1993 95 00 00 Fabricated Aileron Bellcrank Rigging Tool 4J13 July 1 1993 95 00 00 Fabricated Rudder Rigging Tool 4J13 July 1 1993 95 00 00 Fabricated Aileron and Flap Rigging Tool 4J14 July 1 1993 95 00 00 Fabricated Stabilator Rigging...

Page 947: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 95 Cont Effec Page 2 Reissued July 1 1993 4J7 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 948: ...he two lengths of spacers are suitable for balancing most any aircraft wheel 4 The 7 bushings may be made from one inch phenolic or aluminum using a 1 1 2 inch hole saw to cut out the smaller bushing and a 1 3 4 hole saw to cut out the larger By inserting a 1 4 inch long threaded bolt through the pilot hole and securing with a washer and nut a drill press and file may be used to make the off set o...

Page 949: ...edge support to fit the width of the control surface Tighten the set screw on the trailing edge support 5 Adjust the trailing edge support vertically until the beam is parallel with the control surface chordline 6 Remove the tool from the control surface and balance the tool itself by adding or removing nuts or washers from the beam balance bolt When balancing the tool the movable weight must be a...

Page 950: ...Control Surface Balancing Tool Figure 2 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 95 00 00 Page 95 3 Reissued July 1 1993 4J10 ...

Page 951: ...Gear Back Up Extender Actuator Aligning Tool Figure 3 PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 95 00 00 Page 95 4 Reissued July 1 1993 4J11 ...

Page 952: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 95 00 00 Page 95 5 Reissued July 1 1993 4J12 Fabricated Tool for Baggage Door Lock Figure 4 THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 953: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 95 00 00 Page 95 6 Reissued July 1 1993 4J13 Fabricated Aileron Bellcrank Rigging Tool Figure 5 Fabricated Rudder Rigging Tool Figure 6 ...

Page 954: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 95 00 00 Page 95 7 Reissued July 1 1993 4J14 Fabricated Aileron and Flap Rigging Tool Figure 7 ...

Page 955: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 95 00 00 Page 95 8 Reissued July 1 1993 4J15 Fabricated Stabilator Rigging Tool Figure 8 ...

Page 956: ...PIPER AIRCRAFT PA 32R 301 301T MAINTENANCE MANUAL 95 00 00 Page 95 9 Reissued July 1 1993 4J16 GRIDS 4J16 THRU 4L24 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for PA-32R-301T SARATOGA S

Lancair IV Handbook preview
IV
Brand: Lancair Pages: 53
Nova Prion Manual preview
Prion
Brand: Nova Pages: 75
BOMBARDIER Challenger Global 300 Manual preview
Challenger Global 300
Brand: BOMBARDIER Pages: 37
InVento Airglider 40 Owner'S Manual preview
Airglider 40
Brand: InVento Pages: 2
Sky Country Alasca-2 Manual preview
Alasca-2
Brand: Sky Country Pages: 13
ICA IS-28B2 Lark Flight And Maintenance Manual preview
IS-28B2 Lark
Brand: ICA Pages: 56
Aircraft Industries 940213 Flight Manual preview
940213
Brand: Aircraft Industries Pages: 55
Aquila AT01-100C Manual preview
AT01-100C
Brand: Aquila Pages: 106
SUP’AIR EONA User Manual preview
EONA
Brand: SUP’AIR Pages: 28
Boeing 737-300 Series Maintenance Manual preview
737-300 Series
Brand: Boeing Pages: 35
APCO Aviation Play 42 MK-II Manual preview
Play 42 MK-II
Brand: APCO Aviation Pages: 24
APCO Aviation NRG Pro II Manual preview
NRG Pro II
Brand: APCO Aviation Pages: 43

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands